2232994 r 05

336
GE Healthcare Class A MINItrace Installation Manual Direction 2232994-100 Revision 5

Transcript of 2232994 r 05

Page 1: 2232994 r 05

GE Healthcare

Class A

MINItrace Installation Manual

Direction 2232994-100Revision 5

Page 2: 2232994 r 05
Page 3: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Revision History 3

REVISION HISTORY

REV DATE REASON FOR CHANGE

4/27/01 June, 2000 Initial Draft - written during Denver (GammaPlus) installation

0 April 30, 2001 First release, prior to M4

0A July 5, 2002 TOC - TOC updated

Ch 1 - Updated Cross-References, Table 1-1 Updated

Ch 2 - New pictures on new rigging crate, RF-cable, magnet and lifting bolts, update crate content, packing lists and content rig-ging crate, update text and cross-references

Ch 3 - New pictures on shields, raceways, hinges and wrench, update text and cross-references, updated structure in section 3-4

Ch 4 - New pictures shielding, RF-cable connection and stainless steel runs. “Drilling in hand picture” taken away, new information about the cables, update text and cross-references.

Ch 5 - New pictures shielding, target side of cyclotron, diffusion pump, water pump, filling cosmetic gaps, warning lights and door sensors, raceway covers, labelling and update text. New text about filling the cosmetic gaps on the shielding doors.

Ch 6 - New information about Emergency Power Off, Emergency Power Off check added.

Ch 7 - Updated drawings, updated information about checking the rotation direction on water pump and rotary pump, new pic-tures on valves, rotary pump, diffusion pump.

Appendix A - Updated information about Cable Crate and Box Locations, Updated figure, Updated wrong cable positions in tables

Appendix B - New pictures on Swagelok Tube Fitting, updated information about mounting the Swagelok Tube Fitting.

R1 February 28 2003 Ch 4 - New sections about the ventilation of the cyclotron room and the outlet valve panel included.

Ch 5 - New pictures and structure in section 5-2.6

Ch 6 - New section Functional Test added.

R2 July 1, 2004 Incorporate changes from Ed Mastrangli and Scott Moser into Revision 1 document; resolve CQAs

Page 4: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

4 Revision History

R3 July 26 2006 New front page

Ch 3 - Section 3-4.1 added

Ch 5 - Section 5-2.1 updated

Ch 7 - Section 7-4.3 updated

R4 8/18/2006 New document layoutCh 4 - Figure 4-14 updatedAppendix D updated

R5 June 8 2007 Appendix G updated with Caution about terminal screws

REV DATE REASON FOR CHANGE

Page 5: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Table of Contents 5

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 — INSTALLATION STEERING GUIDE........................................................................... 9

1-1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................. 91-2 Installation Overview......................................................................................................................... 10

CHAPTER 2 — UNPACK THE SYSTEM ............................................................................................15

2-1 Recommended Handling Procedures ....................................................................................... 152-1-1 Riggers’ Responsibilities.......................................................................................................................... 152-1-2 Site Representative’s Responsibilities ............................................................................................... 162-1-3 Installation Tool Box (Gang box).......................................................................................................... 18

2-2 Required Installation Tools ............................................................................................................. 192-3 Check for Transit Damage.............................................................................................................. 202-4 Unpacking Instructions .................................................................................................................... 212-4-1 Rigging Crate (Part # 2298267) ........................................................................................................... 232-4-2 Unpack the Magnet Shipping Container ......................................................................................... 252-4-3 Unpack the Shields.................................................................................................................................... 292-5 Check Crate Contents and Packing Lists ................................................................................. 332-6 Return Procedures for Packages................................................................................................. 352-6-1 DOA (Dead On Arrival) Parts Return................................................................................................... 352-6-2 Return the Lifting Yoke and Pressure Valve ................................................................................... 352-6-3 Return the Rigging Crate ........................................................................................................................ 352-6-4 Return the Installation Gang Box........................................................................................................ 352-7 Pack the Rigging Crate..................................................................................................................... 362-7-1 All Service Poles (GEMSE, GEMSA, GEMSAM).................................................................................. 362-7-2 GEMSE Service Pole .................................................................................................................................. 36

CHAPTER 3 — POSITION THE SUBSYSTEMS.................................................................................39

3-1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................... 393-2 Move the MINItrace Magnet into the Room........................................................................... 393-2-1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................................. 39

3-3 Move the Rear (Fixed) Shields into Position ............................................................................ 473-3-1 Attach the Hi-jacker Assembly to the Shield Component ........................................................ 473-3-2 Prepare for the Weight of the Shields............................................................................................... 503-3-3 Move the First Rear (Fixed) Shield into Position ............................................................................ 513-3-4 Caulk and Paint the Magnet Niche .................................................................................................... 583-3-5 Install the First Three Inner Plastic Shields ..................................................................................... 593-4 Move the Magnet into the Shield................................................................................................. 613-4-1 Install the inner Shield Wedges ........................................................................................................... 623-4-2 Square the Magnet.................................................................................................................................... 65

3-5 Attach Right and Left Shield Doors............................................................................................. 673-5-1 Attach Hi-jacker Assemblies ................................................................................................................. 673-5-2 Assemble Fixed Shield Hinges.............................................................................................................. 683-5-3 Move the Shield Doors into Position.................................................................................................. 713-5-4 Align the Shield Doors to the Fixed Shield Hinges....................................................................... 74

Page 6: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

6 Table of Contents

3-5-5 Pin and Adjust the Shield Doors .......................................................................................................... 753-6 Support Cabinets and Panels ........................................................................................................ 803-7 Position the Electronics Cabinets ................................................................................................ 843-8 Assemble the Shielded Raceway................................................................................................. 883-9 Clean up the Cyclotron room......................................................................................................... 913-10 Unpack and Position the MASTER ............................................................................................... 923-10-1 MASTER Transceiver ................................................................................................................................ 923-10-2 Unpack and Position the MASTER Terminal................................................................................... 92

CHAPTER 4 — INSTALL THE CABLES, HOSES AND PIPES .......................................................... 93

4-1 Run the Power and Signal Cables ............................................................................................... 944-1-1 MINItrace Cabling Information ............................................................................................................ 944-1-2 Install the Magnet Power Cables ........................................................................................................ 984-1-3 Install the RF Cable.................................................................................................................................... 994-2 Hose and Pipe Information.......................................................................................................... 1044-3 Attach the Hoses .............................................................................................................................. 1074-3-1 Attach the Cyclotron Supply Panel Hoses.....................................................................................1084-3-2 Attach the MINItrace Cooling Hoses................................................................................................1124-3-3 Attach the Electronics Cabinet Cooling Hoses ............................................................................1134-3-4 Polyurethane Connections...................................................................................................................1144-3-5 Pull the Product Lines to the Hot Lab..............................................................................................1174-3-6 Outlet Selection Panel ............................................................................................................................1194-3-7 1/8" Stainless Steel Pipes .....................................................................................................................1204-4 Cyclotron Room Ventilation......................................................................................................... 124

CHAPTER 5 — ASSEMBLE THE CYCLOTRON..............................................................................127

5-1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 1275-2 Assemble the Target Side of the Cyclotron.......................................................................... 1295-2-1 Install Inner Shield 5 ...............................................................................................................................1295-2-2 Install the Targets ....................................................................................................................................1325-2-3 Target Support Cabinet (TSC)..............................................................................................................1345-2-4 Install the Helium Compressor(s) ......................................................................................................1355-2-5 Attach the Helium Compressor Hoses............................................................................................1375-2-6 Install the Valve Panel and Target Cooling Manifold................................................................1405-2-7 Paint the Inner Doors .............................................................................................................................1465-2-8 Attach Outer Shield Assemblies to Left Door...............................................................................1465-3 Assemble the Vacuum Side of the Cyclotron...................................................................... 1495-3-1 Attach the Diffusion Pump to the Accelerator.............................................................................1495-4 Finish the Cyclotron Installation................................................................................................ 1555-4-1 Final Door Adjustments.........................................................................................................................1555-4-2 Install Right and Left Cosmetic Covers...........................................................................................1565-4-3 Fill the Cosmetic Cover Gaps and Door Picking Point..............................................................1575-4-4 Final Cleanup and Repair of Damage.............................................................................................1605-4-5 Final Touch-up of Outer Shield Surfaces .......................................................................................1605-4-6 Install Warning Lights and Door Sensors......................................................................................1605-4-7 Install the Right and Left Door Motors............................................................................................1625-4-8 Touch-up Scratches - Paint Electronics Cabinet Surfaces .....................................................163

Page 7: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Table of Contents 7

5-4-9 Attach the Shield Door Handles ........................................................................................................1635-4-10 Attach System Labels.............................................................................................................................164

CHAPTER 6 — SYSTEM PHASE AND POWER CHECKS...............................................................167

6-1 Input Power .........................................................................................................................................1676-2 MASTER Power Checks ...................................................................................................................1676-3 Mains Distribution Panel (MDP) Power Checks....................................................................1686-4 CCAB Power Checks ........................................................................................................................1696-5 PSMC Power Checks ........................................................................................................................1716-6 RFPG Power Checks.........................................................................................................................1726-7 Emergency Power Off Checks.....................................................................................................1736-8 Start up Conditions Checklist ......................................................................................................174

CHAPTER 7 — START-UP AND CALIBRATION SEQUENCE .......................................................177

7-1 Start-up Sequence ...........................................................................................................................1777-2 Control System...................................................................................................................................1787-3 Water Cooling System....................................................................................................................1817-3-1 Fill the Secondary Water Cooling System with Water.............................................................1817-3-2 Start up the Secondary Water Cooling System ..........................................................................1867-3-3 Check the Cooling Water Temperature Sensor ..........................................................................1907-3-4 Check the Shunt Valve Temperature Control Adjustment .....................................................1937-4 Vacuum Chamber Checks ............................................................................................................1957-4-1 Clean the Cyclotron Room and Accelerator Surfaces..............................................................1957-4-2 Inspect the Vacuum Chamber............................................................................................................1957-4-3 Install the last four Shield Wedges...................................................................................................1967-4-4 Check the Extraction System..............................................................................................................1977-4-5 Calibrate the Extraction Motor...........................................................................................................1987-4-6 Check the Diagnostic System .............................................................................................................2017-4-7 Inspect the Center Region and Ion Source. ..................................................................................202

7-5 Vacuum System.................................................................................................................................2047-6 Magnet System..................................................................................................................................2127-7 RF System.............................................................................................................................................2167-8 Helium Cooling, LTF, and Target Support System Checks.............................................2257-8-1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................2257-8-2 F18- Option: Single and Dual Extraction systems .....................................................................2267-8-3 Check the F18- Target Water and Product Line Connections ..............................................2287-8-4 Check the 13N Option Connections.................................................................................................2307-9 Beam Tuning.......................................................................................................................................2327-9-1 Condition the System.............................................................................................................................2327-9-2 Tune the Beam..........................................................................................................................................2337-10 Target System Start-up..................................................................................................................2357-10-1 Resize the Collimator Opening...........................................................................................................2397-10-2 Install the Collimator and Resize the Opening............................................................................241

7-11 Functional Test...................................................................................................................................2447-11-1 Required Equipment...............................................................................................................................2447-11-2 Radiation License.....................................................................................................................................2447-11-3 Inspection....................................................................................................................................................244

Page 8: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

8 Table of Contents

7-11-4 Operator Report........................................................................................................................................2447-11-5 Test Procedure ..........................................................................................................................................245

7-12 FDG Micro Lab ................................................................................................................................... 254

APPENDIX A — CABLES ................................................................................................................255

APPENDIX B — CONNECTORS..................................................................................................... 267

APPENDIX C — GCS CONFIGURATION VALUES ........................................................................289

APPENDIX D — MINITRACE GAS PURITY AND PRESSURE SETTINGS.....................................293

APPENDIX E — DAILY RECORDS LOG .........................................................................................297

APPENDIX F — POWER ON/OFF SEQUENCES ...........................................................................305

APPENDIX G — RFPG TRANSFORMER TAPS ..............................................................................309

APPENDIX H — START-UP CERTIFICATE ....................................................................................329

Page 9: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 1 —Installation Steering Guide 9

CHAPTER 1 — INSTALLATION STEERING GUIDE

This manual describes the PET MINItrace Production System installation process, up to, but not including, the Performance Demonstration and customer acceptance.

1-1 IntroductionUse this chapter as a general guide to the installation. The Installation Steering Guide provides a brief description of each phase of the installation, and the location of the detailed instructions elsewhere in the manual. The instructions include boxes to check when you complete each subsection or step. The final six chapters are laid out in a logi-cal sequence, so that each chapter covers a phase of the installation:

• Chapter 2 - page 15

• Chapter 3 - page 39

• Chapter 4 - page 93

• Chapter 5 - page 127

• Chapter 6 - page 167

• Chapter 7 - page 177

This manual also contains several appendices that contain tables to record start-up val-ues or other information used by one or more chapters.

Note: Some sites are literally built around the cyclotron, so several weeks may elapse between the system delivery and the actual start of the installation. The customer must provide secure storage for the rest of the system, and arrange for the riggers to come back to move the heavy components into place.

During a MINItrace system installation, you have to:

• Unpack and rig the major system components.

• Assemble the fixed shields, position the magnet and attach the shield doors.

• Position the components and attach the support cabinets to the shield.

• Run the power and signal cables.

• Run the hoses, compressed air, gas and product pipes or tubes.

• Attach the Target cooling panel, diffusion pump and vacuum rotary pump to the magnet.

• Make the connections to the MINItrace components.

• Start-up the system.

• Run the initial beam tests, and check the system function.

• Run the Performance Demonstration for customer acceptance.

Page 10: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

10 Chapter 1 —Installation Steering Guide

This manual contains instructions for everything except performance demonstration.

1-2 Installation OverviewUse Table 1-1 to track the system installation. Within the chapters, each section, sub-section or step contains a checkbox to mark when you complete the corresponding instruction. When you finish one of the major tasks listed in Table 1-1 , make a check mark in the corresponding box. That way, a new person can quickly determine how far the installation has proceeded, and what tasks remain unfinished.

If this is the your first MINItrace installation, follow the procedures in the order they appear in this manual. If you have previous MINItrace installation experience, you may vary the installation sequence. If you have a team of installers on site, you may assign tasks, and work independently. For instance, one person could assemble the target side of the magnet while another person (or team) attaches the diffusion pump.

Note: Refer to Illustration 1-1. All "right" and "left" shield and support cabinet locations are referenced from the front of the MINItrace.

ILLUSTRATION 1-1MINITRACE SHIELD AND CABINET LOCATIONS

Left shield door

Target Support Cabinet

Right shield door

Cyclotron Support Cabinet

Left rear (fixed) shield

Right rear (fixed) shield11,000Kg

12,500Kg

300Kg

7,900Kg

8,300Kg

150Kg

Shielded raceway

Door motor

Page 11: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 1 —Installation Steering Guide 11

TABLE 1-1MINITRACE INSTALLATION STEERING GUIDE

Installation Phase Tasks

Chapter 2 Unpack the Sys-temStarts on 15

The crated equipment typically arrives on site packed in three 20-ft shipping containers. (In Europe, the crates arrive on three trucks.)The riggers unload the equipment from the containers and transport the components to their positions in the cyclotron facility or storage area.GE representatives supervise the unloading and rigging, inventory the crate contents, and check for damage.System unloaded

Chapter 3 Position the Sub-systemsStarts on 39

Refer to the Site Drawings, and position the major components:Prepare the delivery route from the staging area to the Cyclotron room.Move Cyclotron Magnet into temporary position.Move rear (fixed) shields into position.If possible, clean and paint the rear shields at this time. (See page 58)Attach the first three plastic shields to the left fixed shield.Move Cyclotron Magnet into final position.Assemble hinges and attach shield doors.Start to adjust the shield doors.Attach the Cyclotron Support Cabinet (CSC) to the right rear shield.Attach the Target Support Cabinet (TSC) to the left rear shield.Position the Electronics Cabinets:

- RF Power Generator Cabinet (RFPG)- Control Cabinet (CCAB)

Assemble the raceway between the cyclotron and electronics cabinets.Clean up the Cyclotron room and sweep the floors.Unpack and position the MASTER transceiver and terminal.

Chapter 4 Install the Cables, Hoses and PipesStarts on 93

Refer to the Site Drawings, MIS map and Cable lists, and Chapter 5:Pull the magnet power cables.Install and attach the RF cable.Install the rest of the MINItrace system power and signal cables.Install cooling water lines.Install compressed air and gas lines.

Page 12: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

12 Chapter 1 —Installation Steering Guide

Chapter 5 Assemble the CyclotronStarts on 127

Verify all cables and hoses have been pulled.Repair shipment damage.Paint the inner and outer shield surfaces (Continue to periodically paint and touch up the surfaces until satisfied with the finish.)Install last three left inner shields.Install the Helium compressor(s)Install the Valve panel and Target Cooling Unit.Install targets. (and cover the left side to protect from dirt.)Paint inner doors.Attach outer shield assemblies to left door.Install diffusion pump.Install roughing vacuum pump.Optional: Fill the cooling system with water and bleed the lines.Final door adjustments.Install right and left cosmetic covers.Fill in the gaps between the side shields and support cabinets.Final cleanup and repair of damage.Install warning lights and door sensors. (and connect cables at CSC)Install door motors.Final touch-up and paint of outer shield surfaces.Attach the shield door handles.Touch-up scratches and/or paint Electronics Cabinet surfaces.Attach system labels.

Chapter 6 System Phase and Power ChecksStarts on 167

Check incoming power and phasing (to MDP)Check power from the MDP to the major system components.MASTER Power ChecksCCAB Power ChecksRFPG Power ChecksSupport Cabinet Power Checks

Chapter 7 Start-up and Cal-ibration SequenceStarts on 177

Follow these tasks to sequentially start-up and test the MINItrace system, to prepare for the performance demonstration phase of the installation.Don’t start-up the system until site construction is complete and all gases are present. Start up the system in the following order:

1. Control System

2. Secondary Cooling Water System

3. Magnet Chamber Checks

4. Vacuum System

5. Magnet System

6. RF System

7. Helium Cooling System, LTF System and Target Checks

8. Beam Tuning

Installation Phase Tasks

Page 13: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 1 —Installation Steering Guide 13

9. Target System

10. Beam Performance and Functional Testing

11. Radiochemistry System

Performance Demonstra-tion Phase

Upon successful completion of the system Start-up and Functional Test sec-tions, the equipment enters the Performance Demonstration phase. This manual does NOT describe this phase of the installation. Currently, a quali-fied chemist or technologist arrives on site to run these tests; eventually, the test instructions will be recorded in a direction, and run by a trained FE.

Installation Phase Tasks

Page 14: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

14 Chapter 1 —Installation Steering Guide

Notes and Comments:

Page 15: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 2 —Unpack the System 15

CHAPTER 2 — UNPACK THE SYSTEM

Hire experienced riggers, a crane, and operator to:

• Unpack the MINItrace system.

• Move the large components into position.

• Assemble the rear shields.

• Move the magnet into its niche.

• Help attach the shield doors.

The MINItrace Electronics cabinets (RFPG and CCAB) and Support Cabinets arrive com-pletely assembled, and packed in crates. Additional crates contain specialized rigging equipment, installation tools, cables and cyclotron subsystems, to be assembled on site. You don’t have to unpack all the crates during the rigging process, but you need a crane and riggers to move these crates to the Cyclotron room, or another secure location.

2-1 Recommended Handling Procedures

2-1-1 Riggers’ Responsibilities

• Unpack the magnet and shields.

• Move the magnet into a temporary location in the Cyclotron room.

• Unpack the shields.

• Assemble the rear (fixed) shields and move the magnet into place.

• Help attach the shield doors to the rear shields.

• Uncrate the CSC and TSC support cabinets and move them into the room.

• Uncrate and move the RFPG and CCAB into the room.

Recommended: Rent an appliance dolly to move the CCAB (no wheels).

• Move the rest of the crates and boxes into a secure area in or near the PET suite.

Recommended: It you can’t store the crates in a secure area, rent a 40-ft shipping container for use as a staging area and temporary storage.

• Remove all the shipping materials from the containers and reattach the tops.

• Remove the packing materials and empty crates from the site.

Page 16: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

16 Chapter 2 —Unpack the System

2-1-2 Site Representative’s Responsibilities

The FE or Installation representative has the following responsibilities:

• Oversee the unpacking and positioning of the major components.

• Inventory the crate contents and check for excessive damage.

• The system should arrive with a packing list attached to the cyclotron magnet.

• Inventory the cables. The cables are currently bundled and packaged by MIS group number. Each box in Crate 7 and 8 contains a separate MIS run. Appendix A con-tains a MIS Map, tables of cable information, the cable list , and a list of system des-ignators (acronyms) and definitions.

Note: Expect the shields to look a little rough when they come out of the containers. (Illustration 2-1) The system arrives with paint and supplies to repair chips and cracks in the shield.

ILLUSTRATION 2-1SHIPMENT DAMAGE

Page 17: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 2 —Unpack the System 17

Study the room in Illustration 2-2. This room is ready for Cyclotron delivery.

ILLUSTRATION 2-2FINISHED FLOOR

Raw concrete - no damage to a finished floor from the rigging hardware and anchors

Walls finished, except forfinal coat(s) of paint

Ceiling access for

Direct access to unpacking/staging

Removable section for clearance

area. Minimum travel distance. Crane can fly each piece directlyto the doorway.

Surfaces swept clean (everything else out of the room)

Floor cured for one week

shielded raceway

Page 18: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

18 Chapter 2 —Unpack the System

2-1-3 Installation Tool Box (Gang box)

Arrange for the secure storage of the wooden MINItrace installation gang box. (Part number 2230305)

Refer to Illustration 2-3. The gang box is considered a Regional tool. It contains the tools and hardware you’ll need to install the MINItrace system. The box contains an assort-ment of spare hardware and wall anchors to accommodate a variety of wall finishes. Inventory the contents at the beginning and end of the installation. Restock the items you used during the installation BEFORE you return the gang box.

The gang box should arrive with a complete inventory list . Make sure the box contains enough hardware and drill bits to complete the installation. A consumables kit is sent separately.

ILLUSTRATION 2-3INSTALLATION TOOL BOX (GANG BOX) - 3/4 AND SIDE VIEWS

The gang box contains power tools and tool boxes filled with metric hand tools. In the-ory, it contains everything you need to install the system. REMEMBER to return the hand tools to the individual tool boxes each night, and lock the box each time you leave the site.

Page 19: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 2 —Unpack the System 19

2-2 Required Installation ToolsIn addition to the usual service tool kit , you’ll need the following items to install the MINI-trace system:

• The MINItrace Installation Gang Box, part number 2230305 (Refer to Illustration 2-3)

• Rigging box (part number 2298267), see section 2-4-1 (Ships with the system as Crate #16, or arrives separately from GEMSA or GEMSAM)

• Hand-truck, or pallet-jack with narrow forks (Refer to Illustration 2-4) The forks must be 65cm wide, or less, to accommodate a European pallet.

• Appliance dolly to position the CCAB (Refer to Illustration 2-4) Rent one with solid rubber tires and built-in load binding straps.

• Aluminum platform ladder

ILLUSTRATION 2-4HYDRAULIC PALLET-JACK WITH NARROW FORKS AND APPLIANCE DOLLY

65cm or less

Page 20: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

20 Chapter 2 —Unpack the System

2-3 Check for Transit DamageCheck the shipping containers for physical damage when they arrive on site. In Illustration 2-5, the shield shifted about 5cm during transit , enough to damage the container doors and break the dimensional lumber used to secure it during shipment. Also check the crate exteriors for damage as the riggers unload them from the shipping container.

• Inspect the containers when they are delivered. Immediately report any damage to the driver/freight handler and your local installation specialist .

ILLUSTRATION 2-5DAMAGED SHIPPING CONTAINER

Page 21: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 2 —Unpack the System 21

2-4 Unpacking InstructionsYou have two objectives during this phase of the installation:

• Remove the system components from their trucks or shipping containers.

• Position (stage) the components in the unloading area for efficient access and transfer into the Cyclotron room or to more secure storage.

Use a heavy mobile crane to unload the MINItrace system and crates from the truck or shipping container. Position the crane as close as possible to the facility entrance or access hole. Choose the most direct delivery route from the entrance to the Cyclotron room, as corners can be difficult to negotiate.

For best results: Reserve a 5000 sq-ft area near the facility entrance to unload and stage the system components for delivery to the cyclotron room. This area includes space for the crane, truck and its shipping container or trailer.

ILLUSTRATION 2-6RESERVE A 5000 SQ-FT UNLOADING AREA

In Europe, the MINItrace system arrives crated, on three trucks. Elsewhere, the MINItrace system arrives in three 20-ft shipping containers with removable tops.

To remove the MINItrace crates and components from the shipping container:

• Open the doors and use a forklift or skid loader with at least a 50 ton capacity to remove the crates and components from the shipping container.

• Recommended: Remove the tarp from the top of the container, and use a 60-80 ton crane to remove the magnet and shields (vertically) from the shipping container.

Page 22: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

22 Chapter 2 —Unpack the System

ILLUSTRATION 2-7REMOVE THE TARP FROM THE TOP OF THE CONTAINER

ILLUSTRATION 2-8DISASSEMBLE AND SALVAGE THE PACKING MATERIALS

The magnet and shields are held in place with straps and lumber bracing. Disassemble the packing materials and use the lumber as dunnage. Refer to Illustration 2-9.

Page 23: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 2 —Unpack the System 23

ILLUSTRATION 2-9REUSE THE PACKING MATERIALS

2-4-1 Rigging Crate (Part # 2298267)

Refer to Illustration 2-10, Illustration 2-11 and Illustration 2-12. The rigging crate will either ship as Crate 16 with the MINItrace system (GEMSE), or ship separately (GEMSA, GEMSAM as part number 2298267). It contains the skates, hi-jacker assemblies and accessories used to unload and move the MINItrace shield components into place. A toolbox holds the hardware you need to attach the hi-jacker assemblies. A vacuum cleaner, a ladder and dolly are also included. The rigging crate is currently packed in the same container (or truck) as the MINItrace magnet.

Recommended: Locate and unload Container 1 with Crate 16 first. Use the rigger’s tools and straps to unload the crates.

Do NOT destroy the Rigging Crate! When you finish the mechanical installation, repack the crate and return it to the corresponding service pole. Section 2-7 contains an inven-tory list and instructions to pack the rigging crate for return.

Page 24: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

24 Chapter 2 —Unpack the System

ILLUSTRATION 2-10RIGGING CRATE

ILLUSTRATION 2-11THE HI-JACKERS IN THE RIGGING CRATE

Page 25: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 2 —Unpack the System 25

ILLUSTRATION 2-12HI-JACKERS, SKATES AND CAPS (USED WITH HI-JACKERS)

2-4-2 Unpack the Magnet Shipping Container

The RF cable is packed in crate 12.

Note: Store the RF cable in a safe location before you rig the magnet.

ILLUSTRATION 2-13THE RF CABLE (FACTORY PHOTO)

The Magnet arrives in a container along with the electronics cabinets, cables, support cabinets and rigging tools.

Hi-jackers

Skates

Caps

Page 26: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

26 Chapter 2 —Unpack the System

ILLUSTRATION 2-14THE MAGNET (FACTORY PHOTO)

ILLUSTRATION 2-15REMOVE SUPPORT CABINETS FROM MAGNET CONTAINER

Use lifting straps to remove the crates from the container.

Refer to Illustration 2-16. The magnet arrives with the Lifting Yoke attached.

Page 27: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 2 —Unpack the System 27

ILLUSTRATION 2-16MINITRACE MAGNET

Remember to remove the lifting yoke from the magnet before you move it indoors. For best results, unbolt the lifting yoke, and let the crane operator remove it from the mag-net and set it on the ground. When you finish, follow the instructions on <Text: Hyper-text>35 to return the lifting yoke to the factory or service pole.

ILLUSTRATION 2-17LIFTING YOKE AND HARDWARE

Lifting Yoke

Page 28: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

28 Chapter 2 —Unpack the System

ILLUSTRATION 2-18MAGNET, LIFTING YOKE AND STRAPS (FACTORY PHOTO)

Unload or move the Crates to the designated staging area. The site in the photographs had adequate space and security to store the crates outside. The installers and on-site construction workers disassembled and disposed of the crates as they were emptied. Once opened, the contents of the crates were inventoried and moved to secure storage inside the building.

Recommended: If you cannot store the crates/contents inside the building during sys-tem installation, rent a 40-ft shipping container for use as a temporary staging and stor-age facility. Most companies will provide delivery and pickup services with the rental agreement.

Tools and hardware to install Diffusion pump

RF Cable hardware

Page 29: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 2 —Unpack the System 29

ILLUSTRATION 2-19MOVE THE CRATES TO THE DESIGNATED STAGING AREA

2-4-3 Unpack the Shields

The major MINItrace Shield components arrive on two Trucks/Containers. Each con-tainer holds one rear (fixed) shield and one shield door. For best results: Remove the container tops and use a crane to unload the shields. Disassemble the shipping braces and save the lumber for later use. Tell the crane operator the order in which you plan to move the shields into the building, so he or she can stage the shields to keep crane picks to a minimum.

Refer to Illustration 2-20.Locate the Lifting Bolts in Crate 5 The crate is packed together with the MINItrace Shield components.

ILLUSTRATION 2-20LIFTING BOLTS IN CRATE 5

Rigging Crate

Support Cabinets andCable Bundles

Electronics Cabinet(s)

Page 30: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

30 Chapter 2 —Unpack the System

The tops of the MINItrace shield components each have two or three built in picking points. Fasten the Lifting Bolts onto the hardware in the holes on the shield components, and use them to lift the items from the containers.

Page 31: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 2 —Unpack the System 31

ILLUSTRATION 2-21USE LIFTING BOLTS TO UNLOAD THE SHIELD COMPONENTS

ILLUSTRATION 2-22FIXED SHIELDS HAVE 3 PICKING POINTS

Lifting Bolts from the Rigging Crate

(Riggers supply shackles

Two picking points on shield doors

and chokers.)

Three picking points

Page 32: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

32 Chapter 2 —Unpack the System

ILLUSTRATION 2-23MOVE THE SHIELD COMPONENTS TO THE DESIGNATED STAGING AREA

Page 33: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 2 —Unpack the System 33

2-5 Check Crate Contents and Packing ListsTable 2-1 and Table 2-2 contain the general list of crates, their dimensions, weights and major contents. The European systems arrive on three trucks, usually in 18 meter trail-ers. Systems are shipped overseas in three 20 foot containers. The magnet and crates 6 through 17 are packed into one truck/container and the shields are packed into the remaining two trucks/containers. The system cables are packed with the Control Cabi-net, in crate 9.

Note: Even though the Magnet and Shields have crate number assignments, they aren’t enclosed. They are loaded and secured directly to the shipping container or truck.

Each system arrives with a detailed packing list attached to the magnet.

TABLE 2-1SHIELD CRATE LIST

Crate # Content Dimensions (cm) Weight (kg) Truck/Container#

1 Radiation shield, left back 180 × 140 ×210 12 500 1

2 Radiation shield, left door 180 × 74 × 210 8 300 1

3 Radiation shield, right back 180 × 140 × 210 11 000 2

4 Radiation shield, right door 180 × 74 × 210 7 900 2

5 Cable Ducts 230 × 90 × 60 200 2

Page 34: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

34 Chapter 2 —Unpack the System

TABLE 2-2MAGNET CRATE LIST

Note: The GEMSAM and GEMSA Rigging Tools will ship with the Installation Gang box from the corresponding service pole.

Open each crate and check the contents for damage.

• If you notice any physical damage, write down the crate number and make a note on the packing list.

• Pay special attention to the contents of any crate with external damage.

Note: The system cables should be bundled and separated into MIS runs. Each bundle is packed into a separate box with the Control Cabinet, in Crate 9. Appendix A con-tains a copy of the current cable list , MIS map and system identifiers (Acronyms).

Crate # Content Dimensions (cm) Weight (kg) Truck/Container#

6 Magnet/Cyclotron 113 × 110 × 203 9 600 1

7 Cyclotron and Target Support Cabinet 230 × 130 × 76 620 1

8 Cables and hoses 230 ×130 × 76 390 1

9 Control Cabinet 97 × 78 × 190 600 1

10 RFPG Cabinet 135 × 94 × 208 850 1

11 Vacuum system & cyclotron parts 115 × 180 × 140 1100 1

12 RF Cable 180 × 180 × 30 100 1

13 MT Pre-Installation kit 80 × 120 × 160 1

14 FDG 80 ×60 × 150 140 1

15 MeI 1

16 Rigging tools 100 ×150 × 90 750 1

17 Tool Box 180 × 80 × 100 375 1

Page 35: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 2 —Unpack the System 35

2-6 Return Procedures for Packages

2-6-1 DOA (Dead On Arrival) Parts Return

• GEMSE: Follow the procedure in the Field Engineer Guidelines (2127810-100) to return DOA components.

• GEMSAM: Call the OnLine Center.

• GEMSA: Follow the local guidelines to report DOA components.

2-6-2 Return the Lifting Yoke and Pressure Valve

• GEMSE: Pack the lifting yoke and pressure valve in the rigging box.

• GEMSAM: Contact the local installation specialist for instructions.

• GEMSA: Contact your local office for instructions.

2-6-3 Return the Rigging Crate

• GEMSE: Ship the Rigging Box to the following address:

GEMS PET Systems%Wilson & Co. ABCargo City CityvargenStockholm-ArlandaSE-190 Sweden

• GEMSAM: Contact the local installation specialist for instructions.

• GEMSA: Contact your local office for instructions.

2-6-4 Return the Installation Gang Box

• GEMSE: Ship to the same Stockholm-Arlanda address as the rigging crate (2-6-3).

• GEMSAM: Contact the local installation specialist for instructions.

• GEMSA: Contact your local office for instructions.

Page 36: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

36 Chapter 2 —Unpack the System

2-7 Pack the Rigging CrateWhen you finish the mechanical installation, pack the contents of the Rigging Crate for return to the corresponding service pole. (See <Text: Hypertext>page 35.)

Refer to the illustrations in this section, and check off the corresponding items as you pack them into the crate.

2-7-1 All Service Poles (GEMSE, GEMSA, GEMSAM)

Note: The Rigging Crate may also contain a stepladder.

1. Four Hi-jacker assemblies

2. Two collapsible jack handles

3. Four heavy duty skates (A skate consists of a roller body and top piece.)

4. Four skate steering handles

5. Four caps (that fit over the top of the skate and under the hi-jacker)

6. Hi-jacker spacer for the right rear shield (1)

7. 2 Hi-jacker spacers to clear the magnet yoke.

8. Toolbox containing hi-jacker hardware

9. Hardened steel plates (6)

10. Transport Dolly (4)

11. Dolly

12. Vacuum cleaner with accessories

2-7-2 GEMSE Service Pole

Note: If you are working in the GEMSA or GEMSAM Service pole, contact your local office for return or disposal of the following items.

1. Pressure Valve (from cyclotron magnet)

2. Magnet Transport Shield and hardware

3. Lifting Yoke

Page 37: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 2 —Unpack the System 37

ILLUSTRATION 2-24PACK THE RIGGING CRATE

ILLUSTRATION 2-25PACK THE CAPS

Jack handles Door Transport frameSkates

Magnet Spacers

Steel plates behind

Skate steering handles

the Magnet Spacers

Stepladder accessoriesSteel plates

Transport Dolly

Pack the caps in theHi-jackers

Page 38: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

38 Chapter 2 —Unpack the System

ILLUSTRATION 2-26PACK THE VACUUM CLEANER, DOLLY, STEPLADDER AND TOOL BOX

Page 39: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 39

CHAPTER 3 — POSITION THE SUBSYSTEMS

Follow the instructions in this chapter to position or mount the MINItrace components in the cyclotron room, and attach the support cabinets and cable raceway to the shield.

3-1 IntroductionNote: At this point in time, every facility design is unique. The document writers don’t

know where the architect placed the floor or wall penetrations for the product, ductwork, or power lines in your facility. We don’t know what already exists in the ceiling and wall spaces or what was added. Obtain a detailed set of site drawings, and use them in conjunction with this manual. ALWAYS defer to the site drawings. If it makes more sense to mount a panel or position subsystem in a different order than this manual suggests, by all means do so. Just remember to check each sec-tion as you complete it . Use this manual to track your progress.

3-2 Move the MINItrace Magnet into the Room

3-2-1 Introduction

Move the MINItrace magnet indoors as quickly as possible to prevent damage from exposure to the elements. For best results, consult the site drawings, and if possible, rig the magnet into the Cyclotron room to a spot directly perpendicular to its final position. Otherwise, move the magnet to a temporary indoor location, until you rig the rear shields into place. If necessary, build up the floor to the level of the epoxy area before you push the magnet aside.

ILLUSTRATION 3-1MOVE THE MAGNET TO A TEMPORARY LOCATION

x

X

Temporary Position (out of the way)

Wedge Skates to prevent unintended movement.

X

Final Location

TemporaryLocation

Page 40: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

40 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

3-2-1-1 Prepare the Delivery Route

The illustrations in this section show the optimal facility plan. The double doors to the cyclotron room open directly onto the temporary unloading and staging area. Most of you will not be so lucky. If you followed the MINItrace Pre-Installation manual Site Prepa-ration checklist, you should have a planned delivery route to your facility’s cyclotron room. The riggers should have walked the route to determine anchor locations for the rigging equipment, and floor protection requirements. All doorways should have been measured for minimum clearance, and doors removed, if required. The delivery route should be free from obstructions.

The following MINItrace components could damage unprotected floor surfaces:

• MINItrace magnet: 11,000Kg

• Rear shields: Left shield - 12,500Kg, Right shield - 11,00Kg

• Door shields: Left door - 8,300Kg, Right door - 7,900Kg

• RFPG Cabinet: 750Kg

• CCAB: 300Kg

Refer to Illustration 3-2. Build up surfaces to even out differences in floor levels. Use a minimum 1/4" thickness steel plate to protect the floor from damage by the heaviest components.

ILLUSTRATION 3-2PROTECT THE FLOOR FROM DAMAGE

Use the crane to move the MINItrace components as close to the facility entrance as possible. Set the magnet down on a set of rigger supplied skates, or use the hi-jacker assemblies and magnet spacers from the Rigging Crate. (See section 3-3-1 to attach hi-jackers).

Page 41: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 41

ILLUSTRATION 3-3USE THE CRANE TO MOVE THE MAGNET INTO POSITION

ILLUSTRATION 3-4MAGNET SPACERS FROM THE RIGGING CRATE (FACTORY PHOTO)

Rigger supplied skates

This end down: The lip fits under the

Use the magnet spacers to prevent damage to the cyclotron magnet coils.

Insert the long hi-jacker hardware throughthe hi-jacker assembly and spacer, andfasten everything to the cyclotron.

Orient the spacers so the lip fits in thespace beneath the cyclotron.

Attach one spacer and hi-jacker assemblyon each side of the yoke, Attach the thirdhi-jacker directly to the magnet chamber door.

edge of the cyclotron.

Page 42: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

42 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

CAUTION Refer to Illustration 3-5. Always wedge components on skates, to prevent unintended motion.

ILLUSTRATION 3-5USE WEDGES TO PREVENT ROLL BACK

The riggers have the responsibility to unpack and deliver the MINItrace components to their final position in the Cyclotron room. They determine how to move each piece along the route and into position. Refer to the illustrations in this section for examples and ideas.

Refer to Illustration 3-6 and Illustration 3-7. During the illustrated installation, the riggers anchored the rigging equipment to various locations on the unfinished concrete floor. They also pushed off the anchored angle iron with a house jack (Illustration 3-27). For best results ask the riggers to install the anchors and set up the rigging equipment before the system arrives on site.

ILLUSTRATION 3-6ANCHOR THE RIGGING EQUIPMENT TO THE FLOOR

Page 43: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 43

ILLUSTRATION 3-7ANCHOR THE RIGGING EQUIPMENT TO THE FLOOR

The riggers may use an electric winch, mule or manual device (come-along) to pull or push the magnet along the delivery route and into the Cyclotron room. The delivery route length and complexity determines the number of times the riggers will have to insert new anchors and reposition the rigging tools. The riggers have the responsibility to supply the additional rigging equipment they need to complete the job, in addition to the contents of the Rigging Crate.

ILLUSTRATION 3-8THE RIGGER PULLS THE MAGNET INTO THE CYCLOTRON ROOM

Use straps to pull the components into position, to minimize damage to the finish.

Rigger supplied equipment

Page 44: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

44 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

CAUTION The iron impregnated concrete shields are fairly brittle. When you wrap the rigging straps around the shields, take care to position the metal coupling devices as far away from the corners of the shields as possible. Try to posi-tion the straps so no metal comes in contact with the shield surfaces. Refer to Illustration 3-49. Use wood to protect stationary pieces from damage by the straps and cables used to pull other pieces into place.

ILLUSTRATION 3-9THE MAGNET ENTERS THE CYCLOTRON ROOM

Refer to Illustration 3-1 and Illustration 3-10. Consult the site drawings, and pull the magnet into a position perpendicular to its final installed location.

Lay a set of steel plates to the temporary position.

Cable from the rigger supplied equipment

Rigging strap

Page 45: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 45

ILLUSTRATION 3-10STEEL PLATES AT 90 DEGREES TO TEMPORARY MAGNET POSITION

Attach the steering handles to the skates to pull the magnet onto the new set of plates and rotate the skates 90 degrees. If necessary, use a jack to help shift the magnet onto the new set of plates, or take the weight off the skates to rotate them.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the MINItrace, do NOT lift the magnet by its coils. Do NOT lift the magnet by the vacuum chamber hinge.

ILLUSTRATION 3-11USE A JACK TO HELP SHIFT THE MAGNET

Attach the steering handles to the skates, and use them to manually re-center the skates on the steel plate as the magnet is pulled or pushed into position.

Temporary Position

Installed Position

Delivery Route Wedged to prevent roll back

Skate Steering Handle

Do NOT lift the magnet by its coils!

Page 46: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

46 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

ILLUSTRATION 3-12PUSH MAGNET INTO TEMPORARY POSITION

If necessary, build up the Cyclotron room floor to the level of the epoxy area, and push the Magnet partially off of the epoxy floor until the rear shields are in place. Wedge all four skates to prevent unintended movement.

ILLUSTRATION 3-13MAGNET IN TEMPORARY LOCATION

Steering handle toreposition skates.

When Complete

Cyclotron Magnet moved into Temporary Position

Wedge (all four) skates to prevent unintended movement

Page 47: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 47

3-3 Move the Rear (Fixed) Shields into PositionNote: If necessary, move the Electronics cabinets into position first. (See section 3-7)

3-3-1 Attach the Hi-jacker Assembly to the Shield Component

Refer to Illustration 3-14.The MINItrace shield components are pre-drilled and tapped to accept three of the hi-jacker, cap and skate assemblies that ship in the Rigging Crate.

ILLUSTRATION 3-14EACH SHIELD COMPONENT HAS PRE-DRILLED AND TAPPED HOLES

Hi-jackerSkate Cap

Mounting holes

Hinge Race

Use the shield spacer from the Rigging crate to attach the hi-jackerto the interior of the right fixed shields.

Page 48: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

48 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

Refer to Illustration 3-15 and Illustration 3-16. The hi-jacker has a lip that fits beneath the shield component, and carries the weight. The hydraulic jack sits on a sliding block. The bottom of the block fits into the cap, which in turn fits over the skate.

ILLUSTRATION 3-15ATTACH HI-JACKER TO SHIELD

ILLUSTRATION 3-16HI-JACKER ASSEMBLY

1. Attach three hi-jacker assemblies to the first shield you plan to move into position.

• Attach the fourth hi-jacker assembly to the second fixed shield.

Note: Use the shield spacer to attach the hi-jacker to the interior of the right fixed shield.

2. Slip the lip under the shield, and loosely fasten the hi-jacker to the shield.

3. Place a cap over the skate.

4. Lift the sliding block, move the skate into place, and lower the block into the cap.

Lip slips beneath shield

Fits into Cap

Mounting holes

Release Valve

Page 49: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 49

5. Center the hydraulic jack on the sliding block, and adjust it to fit the hi-jacker.

6. Tighten the hi-jacker mounting bolts.

7. Refer to Illustration 3-19. Position a set of steel plates beneath each skate.

8. Close the release valve on each jack, attach the jack handle and raise the jacks to transfer the weight of the shield to the hi-jacker assembly.

• Use the jack handle to open and close the release valve.

9. Attach the steering handles to the skates, so you can center the assembly over the steel plate as the shield is pulled along.

ILLUSTRATION 3-17STEERING HANDLE

Page 50: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

50 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

3-3-2 Prepare for the Weight of the Shields

If necessary, prepare the delivery route to accommodate the weight of the rear shields. Use the lumber salvaged from the shipping containers. After the right rear shield destroyed it , the sidewalk extension in the illustration was upgraded from plywood to lumber salvaged from the shipping container.

ILLUSTRATION 3-18PREPARE FOR THE WEIGHT OF THE SHIELDS

Heavy shields will delaminate plywood and emboss 1/8" steel plate.

Page 51: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 51

3-3-3 Move the First Rear (Fixed) Shield into Position

Move the rear shield that is physically the farthest from the doorway into position first. Use the floor anchors, rigging tools and riggers to move the shield into position.

ILLUSTRATION 3-19PULL THE FIRST REAR SHIELD INTO THE CYCLOTRON ROOM

Consult the site drawings, and move the first shield into its exact position before remov-ing the hi-jacker assemblies. Maintain adequate clearances.

ILLUSTRATION 3-20MAINTAIN ADEQUATE CLEARANCES

One steel plate for each hi-jacker assembly

Page 52: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

52 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

ILLUSTRATION 3-21MOVE THE SHIELD INTO ITS FINAL POSITION

Remove two of the hi-jacker assemblies, and transfer them to the second shield. Leave the third hi-jacker in place, until you are sure the first shield is in its exact location.

ILLUSTRATION 3-22REMOVE TWO OF THE HI-JACKER ASSEMBLIES

Spacer for interior of the right fixed shield

Page 53: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 53

3-3-3-1 Move the Second Rear Shield into Position

Move the second rear shield to the facility entrance.

ILLUSTRATION 3-23MOVE THE SECOND REAR SHIELD

Attach the remaining hi-jacker assemblies.

ILLUSTRATION 3-24ATTACH HI-JACKER ASSEMBLIES TO SECOND REAR SHIELD

Page 54: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

54 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

Move the shield into position next to the first rear shield.

ILLUSTRATION 3-25USE THE STEERING HANDLES TO ADJUST THE SKATES

ILLUSTRATION 3-26MOVE THE SECOND SHIELD INTO THE CYCLOTRON ROOM

If necessary, use a house jack and dimensional lumber to push the shield into position.

Page 55: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 55

ILLUSTRATION 3-27PUSH THE SHIELD INTO POSITION

Bring the two rear shields together.

ILLUSTRATION 3-28MOVE THE SECOND SHIELD INTO POSITION

Make any fine adjustments to align the rear shields. You have two adjustment methods; you may push or pull the shields into place.

• Illustration 3-27 illustrates one method to push.

• Illustration 3-29 illustrates a method to pull.

Extra weight to keep lumber in place.

Reuse rigging anchors to fasten angle iron to floor. Brace jack and push off against angle iron.

Page 56: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

56 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

ILLUSTRATION 3-29ALIGN THE REAR SHIELDS

Refer to Illustration 3-30 and Illustration 3-31.

Loosely bolt the shields together. The shields have two openings for 24mm through-bolts on the shield tops, and one opening on the front surface of the magnet niche.

ILLUSTRATION 3-30BOLT THE TWO SHIELDS TOGETHER

Use the jack handles to open the release valves and drop the jacks.

Page 57: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 57

Make sure the two shields are still aligned, then remove all the hi-jacker assemblies and tighten the through-bolts.

ILLUSTRATION 3-31CHECK ALIGNMENT AND TIGHTEN BOLTS

When Complete

Left Rear Shield in Place

Right Rear Shield in Place

Two additional through-

Opening for

bolt openings on top ofthe shields

through-bolt

Page 58: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

58 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

3-3-4 Caulk and Paint the Magnet Niche

If possible, finish positioning the rear shields at the end of the day, or near a scheduled break, so you can caulk and paint the inner niche before moving the magnet into the final position.

CAUTION Do NOT apply caulk to the penetrations and cable/hose raceway openings!

The system or installation gang box ships with a caulk gun and tubes of caulk.

• Before painting, apply a bead of silicon caulk to the gaps between the fixed shields and the floor.

• You may paint immediately after caulking.

The system or installation gang box ships with three 2.5 liter buckets of white paint, enough to apply two or three coats to the exposed areas of the magnet and shields.

• The paint is water-based, and dries to the touch in about 30 minutes.

• For best results, wait at least 12 hours between coats.

• To prevent injury, pad the Hinges until ready to attach the shield doors.

ILLUSTRATION 3-32PAINT THE SHIELD INTERIOR BEFORE MOVING THE MAGNET INTO POSITION

Magnet Niche

Apply a bead of caulk between the fixed shieldand the floor

Do NOT caulk hose/cable raceway openings!

Page 59: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 59

3-3-5 Install the First Three Inner Plastic Shields

Note: You will install the remaining plastic shields when you finish assembling the target side of the magnet, in Chapter 5.

1. Locate and remove the three inner plastic shields from Crate 7.

• The three shields are labeled, Inner Shield 4, and are identical and interchange-able.

• These are the only plastic shields with eight holes.

2. Refer to Illustration 3-33, and fasten the right and left support brackets to the shield.

a. Locate and remove Shield Block Support 1, P/N 906274, and Shield Block Sup-port 2, P/N 906275, from the installation kit .

b. Fasten Shield Block Support 1 to the right side of the target niche with two sets of P/N 904632 screws, and P/N 903998 washers.

c. Fasten Shield Block Support 2 to the left side of the target niche with two sets of P/N 702691 screws, and P/N 703438 washers.

d. Measure the distance from the floor, and adjust the supports, as needed, until the tops of the brackets are 472mm from the floor surface, then tighten into place.

3. Rest the three plastic shield, in any order, on the Shield Block Supports, and attach them to the left fixed shield with the M8 hardware:

• Each shield has three holes drilled near the upper and lower edges. The two middle holes are counter-sunk. Insert a 140mm M8 screw through the two middle (counter-sunk) holes in all three plastic shields and fasten them to the fixed shield.

4. Remove the right bracket, Illustration 3-33, to make room for one hi-jacker. You will reattach the bracket when you assemble the target side of the cyclotron, in Chapter 5.

Page 60: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

60 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

ILLUSTRATION 3-33INSTALL THE FIRST THREE PLASTIC SHIELDS

Center holes are counter-sunk

Note: After you attach the first three shields, remove the right bracket to accommodate the hi-jacker.

Shield Block Support 2, P/N 906275

Shield Block Support 1, P/N 906274

(Left Bracket)

(Right Bracket)

Page 61: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 61

3-4 Move the Magnet into the ShieldFollow the procedures in this section to remove the magnet transport shield and move the magnet into position within the fixed shields.

OPTIONAL: Pull and terminate the Magnet power cables before pushing the magnet into place. Chapter 4, Section 4-1-2 contains the instructions to install the magnet power cables.

Refer to Illustration 3-34 and Illustration 3-36. Attach three hi-jacker assemblies to the magnet, and insert a steel plate under each skate. Use a magnet spacer with each of the sidehi-jackers, to protect the magnet yoke. Attach the third hi-jacker directly to the magnet chamber door.

• Attach the steering handles to the skates, and use them to center the magnet within the shield. Tolerances are very tight, so take care to align the magnet before you push it into the niche. (See Illustration 3-34.)

ILLUSTRATION 3-34: USE THE STEERING HANDLE TO MOVE MAGNET INTO PLACE

Refer to Illustration 3-35. Remove the magnet transport shield.

• Remove the four M12 bolts that fasten the transport shield into place.

• GEMSE: Send the magnet transport shield back to Sweden with the rigging crate. GEMSAM and GEMSA: Contact your local office for return instructions.

CAUTION The extraction motor assembly on the magnet is fragile. Take care NOT to damage the extraction motor while removing the transport shield and mov-ing the magnet.

Steering handles

Page 62: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

62 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

ILLUSTRATION 3-35MAGNET TRANSPORT SHIELD

3-4-1 Install the inner Shield Wedges

The 13 shield wedges were removed during system disassembly, and the magnet trans-port shield was attached to the cyclotron by the holes tapped into the assembly to hold the wedges in place. The nine inner shield wedges have to be installed at this time.

1. Refer to Illustration 5-1: Inner shield Assembly.

• The shield wedges should be labeled with the parts list call-out number.

2. Locate the 13 shield wedges that were packed with the plastic shields in Crate 11.

3. Attach the following nine shield wedges to the vacuum chamber with a washer and the M12 bolt that measures 381mm from end-to-end (NOT thread length):

• Shield Wedge 4 (rests against the chamber wall)

• Shield Wedge 9

• Shield Wedge 9

• Shield Wedge 10

• Shield Wedge 10

• Shield Wedge 10

• Shield Wedge 10

• Shield Wedge 10

• Shield Wedge 12

4. The four remaining wedges will be installed later when the cyclotron can be opened.

The transport shield protectsthe extraction motor fromdamage during shipment.

Systems with the Dual Extractionoption have two more motorsmounted here.

Page 63: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 63

ILLUSTRATION 3-36HI-JACKER ASSEMBLY LOCATIONS ON MAGNET

Push the magnet all the way against the rear shield. The magnet should square itself against the shield. The vacuum chamber door opening will align with the shield surface. Use the house jack and dimensional lumber to push the magnet into the niche.

ILLUSTRATION 3-37CHECK THE POSITION OF THE MAGNET

Hi-jacker with skate

Steel plate

Magnet spacer

Vacuum Chamber door flush

Watch tolerances; concrete fairly brittle

with rear shield

Page 64: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

64 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

ILLUSTRATION 3-38: PUSH THE MAGNET INTO PLACE

Remove the hi-jacker assemblies and steel plate, and prepare to move the first shield door into position. (See section 3-5 on page <Text: Hypertext>page 67.)

ILLUSTRATION 3-39MAGNET IN POSITION

Page 65: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 65

3-4-2 Square the Magnet

If the magnet doesn’t sit squarely against the rear shield, the doors won’t close properly. If you discover this after somebody removed the rigging anchors, use salvaged shipping materials, 12mm all-thread from the rigging tool box, and the jack from the installation tool box to shift the magnet by a few millimeters.

Refer to Illustration 3-40 and Illustration 3-41. To square the magnet, use pieces of all-thread and nuts from the rigging tool box to fasten one of the MINItrace shipping straps to the hi-jacker mounting holes in the rear shield. Position a piece of dimensional lumber against the front hi-jacker assembly, and tighten the strap.

ILLUSTRATION 3-40SQUARE THE MAGNET IN ITS NICHE

ILLUSTRATION 3-41CLOSE UP OF SHIPPING STRAP FASTENER

Hi-jacker mounting holes Shipping Strap

Tighten the strap

Page 66: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

66 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

Insert the remote jacker between the block on the hi-jacker assembly and the lumber, and pump the jack to shift the magnet. The magnet should square itself against the shield.

Monitor the all-thread connections as you shift the magnet. If they show any signs of stress, stop immediately and remove tension from the strap.

ILLUSTRATION 3-42USE THE JACK FROM THE INSTALLATION TOOL BOX

Page 67: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 67

3-5 Attach Right and Left Shield Doors

3-5-1 Attach Hi-jacker Assemblies

The shield doors are more narrow, and more easily tipped than the rear shields. The Rig-ging Crate contains a Door Transport Frame that connects two hi-jackers into an assembly to stabilize the door. The rigging tool box contains the hardware to attach the transport frame to the hi-jacker assemblies, and the completed Door Transport Assem-bly to the door shield.

Refer to Illustration 3-43. Remove the Door Transport Frame and two hi-jackers from the Rigging Crate. Attach each hi-jacker to the transport frame with four sets of M12 hard-ware. Roll the Door Transport Assembly over to the side of shield door opposite the hinge race. (The prototype shown in the illustration does not have its wheels.) Center the holes in the frame under the anchors in the shield. Tip the assembly on its side, and attach it to the shield with four M12 bolts and two M16 bolts. Attach the third hi-jacker directly to the hinge side of the shield.

ILLUSTRATION 3-43ATTACH DOOR TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY TO SIDE OPPOSITE THE HINGE

M12 bolts and washers

M16 hardware

Wheel location (future)

Attach Hi-jackers with 4 sets of M12 hardware

Page 68: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

68 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

3-5-2 Assemble Fixed Shield Hinges

Each shield door hinge race holds a bearing assembly covered by a washer/gasket. The bottom of the door is pinned with a threaded steel pin that also adjusts the door height. The top of the door is pinned with a brass and steel eccentric that also adjusts the door location, relative to the fixed shield. Before they disassemble the system, the mechanics mark and scribe all four bearing assemblies and hinge races, and scribe marks on the eccentric pins and upper hinges. The hinge race and the hinge bearing cases are marked with UL (upper left), UR (upper right), LL (lower left) and LR (lower right). When you reassemble the hinges, use the marks and scribes as a starting point.

ILLUSTRATION 3-44MARKS ON THE UPPER LEFT HINGE BEARING CASE

.

1. Refer to drawing CAC210-31011-xx-2 (bottom hinge), CAC210-31010-xx-2 (top hinge), Illustration 3-44 and Illustration 3-47.

2. Insert the corresponding bearing assembly into each fixed shield hinge race.

• Make sure the marks on the hinge bearing case match the marks on the hinge race. Align the scribe marks.

Upper Left (UL)marks on bearing case

Page 69: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 69

ILLUSTRATION 3-45ALIGN THE SCRIBE MARKS

3. Refer to the drawings and screw all the adjusting threads (set screws) into the cor-responding tapped holes in the hinge race or bearing assembly.

• The long threads with the nuts screw directly into the bearing assembly and pull the assembly away from the fixed shields. Screw these threads all the way into the bearing assembly, and tighten. Slide a washer onto each thread and attach the nut, but do NOT tighten it . Leave a gap between the nut and the hinge race.

• The short adjusting threads without the nuts press against the bearing assem-bly and push the assembly toward the fixed shields. Screw the threads into the tapped holes in the hinge race, but do NOT tighten them against the bearing assembly. Leave a gap between the thread and the bearing assembly.

4. Apply a layer of molycoat to each bearing assembly.

Line up the scribe markson the bearing assemblyand hinge race.

Adjusting threads withnut are pullers.Threads screw into thebearing assembly.

Adjusting threads without nutsare pushers. Threads screw into tappedholes on hinge race.

UL

UL

Page 70: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

70 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

ILLUSTRATION 3-46BOTTOM HINGE RACE WITH BEARING ASSEMBLY

5. Cover each bearing assembly with a washer/gasket, placed gasket side down.

ILLUSTRATION 3-47BOTTOM HINGE WITH WASHER IN PLACE

Washer, placed gasket side down

Leave this hardware loose onboth the top and bottom hinges.

Page 71: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 71

3-5-3 Move the Shield Doors into Position

Move the shield door that is physically the farthest from the doorway into the cyclotron room first. Orient the shield for most efficient delivery. Once in the room, the fixed shield and door hinges should meet without having to reorient the shield.

ILLUSTRATION 3-48ORIENT THE SHIELD FOR DELIVERY

Lay steel plate beneath each skate, and pull the shield door into the cyclotron room. Use scrap lumber to prevent damage when you pull the shield into place.

The first shield enters hinge first

Page 72: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

72 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

ILLUSTRATION 3-49PROTECT MINITRACE SURFACES DURING RIGGING

Pay attention to clearances when you pull the door past the fixed shields and magnet. Use the steering handles to adjust the skates and reposition the door.

ILLUSTRATION 3-50WATCH CLEARANCES

Relocate the rigging equipment, as needed, to bring the door into position.

Three skates; three plates

Use scrap lumber toprotect the magnet.

Watch clearances

Use steering handles to reposition door

Page 73: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 73

ILLUSTRATION 3-51BRING DOOR HINGES INTO POSITION

Try to position the door hinges as close as possible to the fixed hinges. If necessary, adjust the jacks to reposition the door hinges.

ILLUSTRATION 3-52BRING HINGES CLOSE TOGETHER

Use a level to make sure the door is absolutely plumb before you try to insert the hinge pin. Refer to Illustration 3-53. Adjust the jacks to level the door. If necessary, insert pieces of steel or wood behind the hi-jacker assembly to fill in any gaps between the door and the back of the hi-jacker. (This prevents any abnormal strain on the steel plate imbedded in the shield door, which could cause it to break free of the door.)

(Photo taken through lead glass observation window)

Page 74: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

74 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

ILLUSTRATION 3-53BRING DOOR INTO PLUMB

3-5-4 Align the Shield Doors to the Fixed Shield Hinges

Adjust the door to bring its hinge assemblies into perpendicular alignment with the fixed hinges. Move the door toward the fixed shield to align the centers of the door hinges with the centers of the fixed hinge bearing assemblies. Expect to take at least an hour to pin a shield door the very first time.

ILLUSTRATION 3-54ALIGN DOOR HINGES TO FIXED HINGES

Pieces of steel fill gaps behindhi-jacker assembly,

Align Hinges

Page 75: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 75

Remember to check the door for plumb every time you adjust the jacks. Maneuver the door into position. Examine the threads on the bottom pins and the corresponding hinges for damage. Apply a light coat of molycoat to the lower portion of the threaded bottom pin, the interior of the brass eccentric and to the lower exterior of the steel eccentric hinge pins.

ILLUSTRATION 3-55PAINT THE PINS WITH MOLYCOAT

3-5-5 Pin and Adjust the Shield Doors

Follow the procedure in this section to pin the doors and complete the preliminary door adjustments. Chapter 5 contains the final door adjustment procedure. Allow the door to settle for a few days before you make the final door adjustments.

Pin the bottom hinge first. (The bottom pins are identical and interchangeable.) The bot-tom pins bear the weight of the door, and are also used to adjust the door for floor clear-ance.

1. Tighten the pin until it enters the bearing assembly.

2. Fasten the locking ring onto the hinge pin, so it isn’t lost, but don’t tighten it yet.

Page 76: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

76 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

ILLUSTRATION 3-56PIN THE BOTTOM HINGE

After you pin the lower hinge, you can adjust the height of the hi-jackers as needed to fit the eccentric pin into the upper hinge and bearing assembly.

1. Assemble the upper hinge pins. One pin set has single scribe marks and the other has double scribe marks.

a. Slide the steel eccentric into the brass casing.

b. Align the scribe marks on the brass and steel.

c. Tighten the set screw to create a single pin assembly. (See Illustration 3-57.)

Note: The eccentric pins are NOT interchangeable. One upper door hinge has a single scribe mark and the other door hinge has double scribe marks. Make sure the marks match.

2. Insert the assembled eccentric pin through the top hinge and make sure it enters the upper bearing assembly.

• Don’t try to align the scribe marks on the pin to the mark(s) on the upper hinge until you lower the door. The object at this time is to insert the pin into the bear-ing assembly.

• Refer to Illustration 3-57. If necessary, use the wrench, included in the Installa-tion tool box, to turn the entire pin assembly until it slides into the bearing assembly.

• You can also raise or lower one or more jacks to help the pin drop into the bearing.

Locking ring

Page 77: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 77

ILLUSTRATION 3-57TOP HINGE PIN

3. After the eccentric enters the bearing assembly, drop the jacks and align the scribe marks on the eccentric with the scribe marks on the upper hinge.

• Lower the jacks all the way, then raise the jack on the end opposite the hinges just enough to take the weight off of the hinges, so you can move the eccen-tric.

4. Refer to Illustration 3-58. The upper hinge has a set screw that fits into the groove that is machined around the middle of the outer brass casing.

• When the shoulder on the brass casing is flush with the top of the upper hinge, the set screw is centered in the groove.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the hinge assembly, carefully align the groove in the eccentric casing to the middle of the upper hinge before you tighten the set screw. For best results, do NOT insert the set screw into its tapped hole until the shoulder on the brass casing is flush with the top of the upper hinge.

5. Tighten the set screw in the upper hinge to fasten the eccentric into place.

6. If necessary, readjust the threads on the hinge races to align all the scribe marks.

• Recommended: Use the modified diffusion pump wrench from the hardware bag attached to the cyclotron to adjust the threads nearest the hinge. (See Illustration 5-28 on <Text: Hypertext>page 151)

7. Tighten all the nuts against the hinge races.

Set screw for eccentric

The wrench ships inthe installation tool box

Page 78: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

78 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

8. Tighten all the pusher threads against the bearing assemblies.

• Each pusher thread should rest against its bearing assembly.

Note: During disassembly at the factory, the mechanics scribed marks on the tops of the door and fixed shield. When all the scribe marks on the hinges and pins are prop-erly aligned, the scribe marks on the doors and shields should also line up.

ILLUSTRATION 3-58UPPER HINGE SET SCREW

9. If necessary, raise the jacks to take the weight off of the bottom hinge.

10. Adjust the bottom hinge pin to raise the bottom of the shield door 3-4mm off the floor.

11. Remove the hi-jackers and move them to the second shield door.

12. Return to Section 3-5-3 and install the second shield door.

CAUTION To prevent injury or damage to the system, wedge the shield doors until the door motors have been installed.

When the shoulder is flush with the top of the upper hinge, Eccentric pin

When the brass casing is centered

When this shoulder is flush

Eccentric pin set screw

with the top of the upper hinge,you can tighten the hinge set screw.

in the upper door hinge, the hingeset screw is aligned with this groovemachined into the brass casing.

you can tighten the hinge set screw. set screw

Page 79: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 79

When Complete

Left Shield Door pinned and wedged

Right Shield Door pinned and wedged

Page 80: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

80 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

3-6 Support Cabinets and PanelsThe Target Support Cabinet (TSC) mounts to the left fixed shield; the Cyclotron Support Cabinet (CSC) mounts to the right shield. The TSC houses the helium compressor(s) and target support panels, such as the Liquid Target Filler (LTF). The Cyclotron Support Cabi-net houses the Secondary Water Cooling Unit (SWCU), and the power distribution, con-trol and status panels for the SWCU, the vacuum system, and the shield doors, as well as a port for the service pc (MSS).

The Cyclotron Supply Panel (CSP) mounts on the wall near the Cyclotron Support Cabinet (CSC). The Valve Panel mounts on a wall near the TSC and gas bottles.

Attach the Support Cabinets to the Fixed Shield

The CSC arrives in Crate 7. The CSC arrives completely assembled, and weighs about twice as much as the TSC. The TSC ships in Crate 7 with the target panel(s) in place. The rest of the TSC components arrive in Crate 11. Crate 7 also contains several additional boxes of components and cables. Move these other boxes into a secure temporary stor-age area.

ILLUSTRATION 3-59SUPPORT CABINET CRATES AND CSC UNPACKED

1. Unpack the support cabinets from their crates.

2. Move all additional boxes into secure storage.

3. Open the cabinet doors, and locate the mounting hardware and keys.

4. The rear shields are pre-drilled and tapped for the cabinet mounting hardware.

Page 81: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 81

ILLUSTRATION 3-60MOUNTING HOLES FOR CYCLOTRON SUPPORT CABINET

5. Use a 6 mm allen wrench to fasten each cabinet to the corresponding shield with four bolts and washers.

6. Check that the side of each cabinet is offset about 10mm from the edge of the rear shield, to provide adequate clearance when opening the cabinet door.

ILLUSTRATION 3-61CYCLOTRON SUPPORT CABINET INSTALLED

Pre-drilled and tapped mounting hole

Page 82: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

82 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

Mount the Panels on the Wall

Note: Continue to check the plumbing to the cooling unit for directional flow inconsisten-cies while the contractors connect the water pipes.

The MINItrace system has two wall mounted panels. The Cyclotron Supply Panel (CSP) acts as the interface between the customer supplied air and water lines, and the MINI-trace system. The Gas Valve panel acts as the interface between the customer supplied gases and the MINItrace Target system.

ILLUSTRATION 3-62WALL MOUNTED MINITRACE PANELS

1. Consult the site drawings for the exact mounting location.

2. Unpack the panels

• The CSP is in Crate 11, box P.

• The Gas Valve panel is in Crate 11, with the Target options.

3. Use the panel as a template, to mark the holes.

• Check your marks with a level before drilling the holes.

4. Use the 8mm expanding anchor bolts shipped with the panels, or if necessary, select other suitable anchors from the gang box.

5. Drill the upper holes.

6. Fasten the panel to the wall by the two upper anchors.

7. Mark the location of the two bottom holes on the wall.

8. Drill the holes and insert the bottom anchors.

Cyclotron Supply Panel

Gas Valve Panel

Page 83: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 83

9. Check the panel tops with a level before you tighten the hardware into place.

When Complete

Cyclotron Supply Panel on wall

Gas Valve Panel on wall

Page 84: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

84 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

3-7 Position the Electronics CabinetsThe MINItrace system has two Power Supply/Electronics cabinets:

• Radio Frequency Power Generator (RFPG) - Crate 10

• Accelerator Control System (CCAB) - Crate 9

ILLUSTRATION 3-63UNPACK THE ELECTRONICS CABINETS AND MOVE THEM INTO POSITION

1. Refer to Illustration 3-63. Move the RFPG and CCAB crates into position and unpack them.

Notice Consult the site specific drawings to determine the exact cabinet locations. The drawings should take the minimum cabinet service clearances into consideration. Otherwise, posi-tion the cabinets to provide a minimum service clearance of 800mm behind the cabinets, and 700mm in front of the cabinets. Once you fix the cabinets into place and install the shielded raceway, do not move the cabinets again.

2. Move the cabinets into the room, and take them off the shipping pallets.

• The RFPG cabinet has wheels. Refer to Illustration 3-64. Build a ramp for the cabinet. Unfasten the cabinet from the shipping pallet and roll it into place.

• The CCAB does NOT have wheels. Refer to Illustration 3-65. Disassemble the shipping pallet and push the cabinet onto the floor. Refer to Illustration 3-66. Rent an appliance dolly to move the CCAB into position.

Page 85: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 85

ILLUSTRATION 3-64BUILD A RAMP FOR THE RFPG CABINET

3. Push the cabinets into place and lower the RFPG cabinet leveling feet.

• Follow the site drawings to position the cabinets. Leave at least 600mm (about 2 feet) minimum distance between the rear of the cabinets and the wall, for service access.

• Adjust the RFPG leveling feet until the two cabinets are even.

Bracket salvaged from shipping brace

Cabinet fastened to shipping pallet(total 4 locations)

Page 86: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

86 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

ILLUSTRATION 3-65DISASSEMBLE THE CCAB PALLET

ILLUSTRATION 3-66RENT AN APPLIANCE DOLLY TO POSITION THE CCAB

4. Check to make sure the cabinets are vertically level, and horizontally even.

Use the Pallet Jack to take the weight off the pallet, then disassemble it, and pushthe CCAB to the floor.

Page 87: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 87

When Complete

RFPG in position and level

CCAB in position and level

Page 88: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

88 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

3-8 Assemble the Shielded RacewayThe shielded raceway runs between the electronics cabinets and the cyclotron, and continues along the top of the cyclotron shield, to connect the TSC and CSC. In most sites, the cyclotron room will have a suspended ceiling. If possible, run the electronics cabinet to cyclotron raceway above the suspended ceiling. The raceway pieces are cus-tomized to the facility and a drawing should arrive with the system. The figures below shows examples from a site.

The shielded raceway arrives in Crate 5:F. Drawing CAC210-31002-xx-1 shows the final raceway configuration.

1. Assemble and attach the raceway to the electronics cabinets.

• Make sure all the hardware is tightly fastened, to prevent damage to the cables.

ILLUSTRATION 3-67ASSEMBLE THE ELECTRONICS CABINET RACEWAY

2. Assemble and attach the raceway to the top of the shield.

ILLUSTRATION 3-68ASSEMBLE SHIELD RACEWAY ON TOP OF SHIELD

Page 89: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 89

3. Assemble the raceway between the cyclotron and the electronics cabinets.

• The system ships with hangers to suspend the raceway from the ceiling.

ILLUSTRATION 3-69USE THE HANGERS TO SUSPEND THE RACEWAY FROM THE CEILING

4. Tighten all the raceway hardware before you run the cables.

Use the hangers to suspend the raceway from the ceiling.

Page 90: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

90 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

ILLUSTRATION 3-70ELECTRONICS CABINETS READY TO CABLE

When Complete

Shielded Raceway in place

Page 91: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems 91

3-9 Clean up the Cyclotron room1. Sweep up all debris from the installation.

2. Refer to Illustration 3-71. Remove the floor anchors, to prevent trip hazards.

ILLUSTRATION 3-71REMOVE TRIP HAZARDS

3. If you haven’t done so already, arrange to have all empty shipping crates and pack-ing materials removed from the site.

4. Vacuum up the dust from drilling and mounting the panels.

5. Wet mop the floor.

6. Clean up the site at the end of each workday.

ILLUSTRATION 3-72CYCLOTRON ROOM - BEFORE AND AFTER

When Complete

Cyclotron room cleaned

Page 92: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

92 Chapter 3 —Position the Subsystems

3-10 Unpack and Position the MASTER

CAUTION For best results, do NOT unpack the MASTER until all construction is com-plete, the room is clean and the floors have been mopped. If you must set up the MASTER before everything is ready, always cover the MASTER with a drop cloth or plastic to protect it from dust and construction debris, when not in use.

Note: The customer provides the table for the MASTER workstation and printer.

3-10-1 MASTER Transceiver

The MASTER transceiver provides the communications link between the MASTER and the MINItrace Tracer Production system. You can mount it on the wall or ty-wrap it to the workstation table. If you mount it on the wall, choose a location near the MASTER.

Refer to the Transceiver documentation for additional information.

Set the Transceiver switches to the following positions:

• Top Switch: W/S

• Power Switch: ON

3-10-2 Unpack and Position the MASTER Terminal

Remove the MASTER components from the shipping boxes. Arrange the components on the table provided for the MASTER. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to cable the components.

Refer to the MINItrace Service Manual - Master System (Dir# 2232999-100) and to the Master System Administration Manual (Dir#2232997-100) for detailed hardware and software installation and configuration.

When not in use, cover the MASTER with a drop cloth or plastic to protect it from dust and construction debris.

When Complete

Master Terminal in Position

Page 93: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes 93

CHAPTER 4 — INSTALL THE CABLES, HOSES AND PIPES

Follow the instructions in this chapter and the designated appendices to begin the installation of the MINItrace power, signal, cooling water, gas and product lines. The shield contains many of the raceways between the cyclotron and the system support and electronics cabinets. To accommodate this integrated design, you need to pull cables, hoses and lines in a specific order. You must also reassemble and interconnect the cyclotron in stages. For best results, take the time to check for the presence of ALL connections to a cyclotron subsystem before you start to assemble it .

Note: Follow all the instructions in Chapter 4 before proceeding to Chapter 5. One person may install the cables (Section 4-1) while another person installs the hoses and pipes (Section 4-2), but each person should follow the corresponding sections from beginning to end. After you complete the tasks in Chapter 4, and proceed to Chapter 5, you may assemble the target and vacuum systems simultaneously.

When the system is disassembled for packing, the lines that run between the LTF and valve panel or Target Cooling Manifold are left attached to the LTF and the lines that run between the Target Cooling Manifold and target(s) are left attached to the TCM. Chapter 5 contains the instructions to reattach these lines to their respective units.

Your system documentation includes a customized MINItrace Pipe Work Drawing and a Cable Block Diagram. Locate and use these drawings to install the system.

• Pipe Work Drawing CAC600-17000-00-1

• Cable Block Diagram, CAC000-51003-00-3

CAUTION Read ALL the information in this chapter before you attempt to run the cables or connect the hoses, pipes and tubes. Some cables may NEVER be cut to length, while others may be cut ONLY to lengths determined by a mathe-matical formula. Each section also contains specific instructions, important information, and references to additional information in the Appendices.

Page 94: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

94 Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes

4-1 Run the Power and Signal Cables

4-1-1 MINItrace Cabling Information

1. Loose cables are bundled by MIS run, packed into separate boxes, and shipped in Crate 7 and 8. contains the MIS map, cable list and matrix, and the definition list of acronyms (component designators) used in the MINItrace documentation.

• The cable destinations are clearly marked on each cable.

• A basic system has 10 MIS runs, plus the RF cable.

• A system with all available options could have up to 25 MIS runs.

• Illustration 4-2 contains an example of the Cable Block Diagram, CAC000-51003-00-3. Direction 2233001 contains a larger (A3/11.5x17") drawing of the Cable Block Diagram

2. Pull the MIS run 3 Magnet Power Cables first. See Section 4-1-2.

• You may pull the remaining cable runs in any order.

3. Pull the MIS run 1a cables to the target side of the cyclotron.

• You will terminate MIS 1a cables during Chapter 5.

4. The MIS run 1b cables go to the vacuum side of the cyclotron and are already mounted in the CSC in crate 7.

• Attach the Magnet Coil Temp switch connectors to the switches shown in Illustration 4-3. (The switches are in series.)

• You will terminate the rest of the MIS run 1b cables during Chapter 5.

5. Wait until you finish the outer surfaces of the shield to install the warning lights, door sensors and door motors which comprise MIS run 2. (See Sections 5-4-6 and 5-4-7.)

6. Pull the MIS run 4 cables through the raceway on top of the shield, from the CSC to TSC.

7. IF the RF Cable has both connectors attached, you can install this cable when you pull MIS run 5. IF the cable arrives with one or both connectors missing, follow the instructions in Appendix B, Section B-3 to determine the cable length and attach the connector.

• Refer to section 4-1-3 for detailed RF cable installation instructions.

8. NEVER shorten the MIS Run 5 cable, SKA, that runs between the RFPG and the cyclotron vacuum chamber; this cable must ALWAYS be 40m long.

• You may coil and store the excess cable in the race without causing signal interference.

9. MIS run 9 cables are already mounted on the magnet in crate 6.

Page 95: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes 95

10. Start the run from the Electronics or Support cabinet end first, and terminate the cables at the cyclotron last.

11. Keep power cables away from the signal cables in the raceways. The raceways are wide enough to provide space for separated power cables, signal cables, hoses, pipes and air lines. Keep runs neat and use plenty of ty-wraps.

• You may coil, ty-wrap and store the excess lengths of cable in the raceway.

12. PAY ATTENTION to the labels on the cables. Most signal cables have a male and female end. Make sure you orient the cables correctly when you run them.

• The cable label describes the termination point. (ex: The end labeled CCAB GCU P3 terminates at connector P3 of the General Control Unit in the CCAB.)

13. For best results, check off each cable in the cable list as you install it .

• When you finish a bundle, color the corresponding run on the MIS Map, Cable Block Diagram and/or Site plans.

14. The Cyclotron Support Cabinet (CSC) arrives with the cables already attached to the components in the Vacuum Cooling and Control panel.

• Remove the loose cable ends from the CSC and run them into the raceway.

• Use the Basic Cable Block Diagram (CAC000-51003-00-3) to locate the desti-nations when you run these cables.

15. The cyclotron has conduits and raceways integrated into and beneath the shield. These penetrations accommodate all the cables, hoses, pipes and tubes.

• The cyclotron cooling hoses exit the bottom of the CSC and run beneath the fixed shield, and into the cavity with the magnet. (See Illustration 4-15.)

• The power and signal cables exit the shielded raceway through the hole in the top of the fixed shield, pass through an integrated conduit, and into a raceway attached to the inner niche wall of the right fixed shield. (See Illustration 4-1 and Illustration 4-4.)

Page 96: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

96 Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes

ILLUSTRATION 4-1CABLE RACEWAY AND PENETRATIONS IN RIGHT FIXED SHIELD

Cable raceway

Shield penetration

RF Cable penetration

Through-boltconnection

Support line raceway for hoses

Contact plate for magnet power

Vacuum Side of the Cyclotron

cables in this raceway

for cables

(Covers snap into place)

Page 97: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes 97

ILLUSTRATION 4-2CABLE BLOCK DIAGRAM (A3 [11.5X17"] SIZE AVAILABLE IN MANUAL 2233001)

Page 98: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

98 Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes

4-1-2 Install the Magnet Power Cables

Refer to Appendix A. The magnet power cables in MIS run number 3 run from the CCAB to the cyclotron magnet. Run these five cables first.

1. Refer to Illustration 4-3. Check the cable connections for tightness and damage to the insulation during shipment. Make sure the insulation covers all metal contact surfaces.

ILLUSTRATION 4-3CHECK MAGNET POWER CONNECTIONS FOR SHIPMENT DAMAGE

2. Refer to Illustration 4-4. Locate the contact plate in the surface mounted shield raceway. Lift the outer edge of each contact cover to flip it open.

3. Attach both + power cables from the magnet to the top left terminal and both - cables to the bottom left terminal.

4. Attach both + power cables from the CCAB to the top right terminal and both - cables from the CCAB to the bottom right terminal.

5. Refer to Illustration 4-4. Attach both ground cables to the cyclotron ground stud.

6. After you attach the cables, check for a very tight connection.

7. Make sure the cables will not touch any hot surfaces on the diffusion pump or inter-fere with the diffusion pump installation.

• Chapter 5 contains the diffusion pump assembly instructions.

Magnet Coil Temp Switches

Page 99: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes 99

ILLUSTRATION 4-4MAGNET POWER CONTACT PLATE IN THE SHIELD RACEWAY

4-1-3 Install the RF Cable

The RF cable arrives in a coil, usually with a connector attached to at least one end.

ILLUSTRATION 4-5COILED CABLE

• IF you must attach one or both connectors, follow the instructions in Appendix B.

Notice If you have to attach a connector to one end of the cable, first measure and cut the cable to length, then push the raw cable end through the corrugated conduit in the shield before attaching the connector. Don’t fasten the other end to the RFPG cabinet until after you attach the connector, so you can pull enough cable through the conduit to work comfort-ably. Attach the connector to the cable, push the excess cable back through the shield conduit, then fasten the ends of the cable to the magnet and RFPG cabinet.

Magnet cable contact plate

Ground stud

Sharper bends than this become permanent.

Page 100: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

100 Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes

1. IF the cable arrives with both connectors attached, one end should have about 50mm of the outer insulation removed near one of the connectors, exposing the outer copper conductor.

• Orient the cable with the exposed conductor at the RFPG cabinet.

• If necessary, refer to the instructions on page 285 in Appendix B to cut away the insulation to expose the copper conductor.

2. Run the RF Cable outside the shielded raceway.

• Consult with the contractor before supporting the cable or fastening it in place. Local building codes may prohibit fastening cable supports to existing compo-nents in the ceiling space.

• If necessary, ask the contractor to shoot some wires into the ceiling, and use them to support the cable over the suspended ceiling.

3. You may not make a single bend in the cable with a radius of less than 180mm or multiple bends with less than 550mm radii.

• Refer to Illustration 4-5. If you make any bends with a smaller radius than these loops, the bend becomes permanent. Plan every bend carefully.

• If you must negotiate a very tight bend, and no alternative routes exist, con-tact the Uppsala factory for additional connector hardware and instructions.

4. Refer to Illustration 4-6. Remove the outer connector retaining ring and C-rings from the cyclotron end of the RF cable.

• The connector retaining ring is held in place by internal C-rings.

• Use a small hammer to tap the retaining ring downward, until it slides down the body of the RF cable connector.

• Remove both C-rings from the connector.

• Remove the retaining ring from the connector.

• Wrap a piece of plastic or bubble wrap around the end of the cable before you insert it into the shield conduit.

5. Start at the RFPG cabinet, and feed the cable above any suspended ceiling, toward the cyclotron.

• If you have to attach a connector to the cable, push the raw end through the conduit in the shield first. (See the note at the beginning of this procedure.)

Page 101: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes 101

ILLUSTRATION 4-6REMOVE THE CONNECTOR RING TO INSTALL THE RF CABLE

6. Refer to Illustration 4-7. Locate the RF Cable penetration to the cyclotron, near the raceway on top of the right rear shield.

RF connector retaining ring

1. Gently tap retaining ring untilit slides down the connector.

2. Remove both C-rings.3. Slide the retaining ring

off the connector.

Page 102: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

102 Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes

ILLUSTRATION 4-7RF CABLE PENETRATION

7. Push the RF cable in through the top of the shield.

• Expect a tight fit and a lot of pushing.

• Currently, the shield uses a corrugated RF Cable conduit. You will feel some resistance as the connector rubs along the corrugated inner surface.

8. Refer to Illustration 4-8. The cable exits the conduit next to the magnet RF connec-tor.

• Use the attached hardware to connect the RF cable to the magnet.

RF Cable Penetration

Ventilation(vacuum side)

Page 103: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes 103

ILLUSTRATION 4-8RF CABLE ENTERS THE CYCLOTRON THROUGH INTEGRATED CONDUIT

9. Refer to Illustration 4-9.

a. Insert the RFPG end of the RF Cable through the top of the cabinet and fasten it to the connector just inside the cabinet.

b. Fasten the grounding collar around the exposed copper conductor and fasten into place with eight sets of M6 bolts, hex nuts, and flat washers.

10. Fasten a hose clamp around the grounding collar and tighten it into place.

ILLUSTRATION 4-9RF CABLE ENTERS THE TOP OF THE RFPG CABINET

Integrated Conduit

RF Cable

RF Cable Connection to RFPG Cabinet

RF Cable with grounding collar

Fasten a hose clamparound the collar.

Page 104: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

104 Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes

4-2 Hose and Pipe Information Every system has a unique Pipe Work Drawing, similar to Illustration 4-10. The labels on the drawing match the labels on the finished hoses. Labels for the lines you cut to length also come with the system, and should be attached after you install the tube. (Some penetrations are too small to accommodate the tubes with their labels.) The Pipe Work drawing also contains a key that describes the types and sizes of tube to use for each run. Lines run between the Cyclotron room and the Radiochemistry lab. The remainder run between the support cabinets and cyclotron subsystems.

• Appendix B contains instructions to make the Swagelok and RF Cable connections.

For best results:

1. Hang a copy of your site’s Pipe Work Drawing in the Cyclotron room.

2. Choose a line to run.

• Pay attention to the number of lines listed for each run on the Pipe Work draw-ing. You should run eight spares for every tefzel product delivery line.

• When you run the spares, remember to use permanent markers to mark both ends of each line with the same unique identifier, so the person changing lines over the coming years can make the correct connections on the first try.

3. Refer to the key, and choose the correct hose, pipe or tube material.

4. The following tables list the connections by destination, or size and type.

• Cyclotron Supply Panel: Table 4-1 on page 109

• 3/8" Rubber Hose (RH): Table 4-2 on page 112

• Rubber hoses from CSC to Electronics Cabinets: Table 4-3 on page 113

• 4mm Polyurethane (Pu): Table 4-4 on page 116

• 1/16" Tefzel: Table 4-5 on page 117

• 1/8" Stainless Steel (SS):Table 4-6 on page 121

• 3/8" Polyurethane (Pu): Table 5-2 on page 138

• 3.18mm Polyurethane (Pu): Section 5-2-6 on page 140

• 1/16" PEEK: Table 5-3 on page 148

5. Crimp the end of the metal pipe shut, or tape the end of the polyurethane or tefzel tubing, to prevent any debris from entering it while you push/pull it to its destina-tion.

6. Feed the pipe/tube through the penetration, to its destination.

Page 105: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes 105

Note: At least one penetration between the cyclotron room and radiochemistry lab should have a piece of PVC conduit with shallow bends installed in it , to accommo-date the tefzel lines that deliver the product to the lab. These lines must be replaced on a regular basis, and the conduit helps ease the way. Run all active and spare tefzel lines through the conduit. Remember to mark the spares.

7. Remove the tape or cut off the crimp, restore the roundness of the open end, and attach it to the corresponding tube fitting.

8. Attach the label to the pipe or tube with two ty-wraps.

9. Cut the pipe to length, fasten the other end to its fitting, and attach the label.

10. Color the corresponding line on the Pipe Work drawing.

• In theory, when you run out of labels, the gas/product pipe work is finished. However, compressed air lines currently do NOT have labels.

Page 106: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

106 Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes

ILLUSTRATION 4-10EXAMPLE OF PIPE WORK DRAWING

Page 107: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes 107

4-3 Attach the HosesThe hoses that run between the CSC and the cyclotron have been cut to length, fitted and labeled. The hoses that run from the CSP to the CSC, and on to the RFPG and CCAB may have to be trimmed to length.

The fittings are already attached to the support panels, cabinets and magnet. The hose clamps are attached to the corresponding panels, along with the mounting hardware. (The installation gang box should also have spares.) The fitted hoses use Swagelok con-nectors. Use a wrench to attach the fitted hoses to the system connectors. Appendix B contains information about Swagelok connectors. If you have to manufacture or refit one of the hoses, first read the information in Section B-1.

The following tables contain piping connections for a dual extraction MINItrace system. If your system has additional options, you will have additional tubes and pipes to install. Every installation has its own Pipe Work drawing, which shows the system connections. Use this drawing to ensure all connections have been made on your system. For best results, color or highlight each line on the drawing as you install it.

Page 108: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

108 Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes

ILLUSTRATION 4-11THE CSP LINKS CUSTOMER SUPPLIED LINES TO THE MINITRACE SYSTEM

4-3-1 Attach the Cyclotron Supply Panel Hoses

On most sites, plumbers and fitters install the water and air lines and make the connec-tions between the air compressor, the chiller and the CSP. The installation team makes the connections between the Cyclotron Supply Panel and Cyclotron Support Cabinet, and from there to the MINItrace subsystems.

To attach an unfitted hose:

1. The hoses that run between the wall-mounted Cyclotron Supply Panel and the Cyclotron Support Cabinet (CSC) need to be cut to length from the raw hose sent with the system.

a. Cut the end of the hose evenly, so it butts snugly against the top of the fitting.

b. Slide a hose clamp onto the hose, then slide the hose onto the fitting.

Customer provides Water and Air

GE supplies the hoses from the CSP to the MINItrace

2 hose clamps on Water In

Valve ON

Make up water Water IN

Water OUT

Hose Fitting

Valve OFFconnections into the CSP

and Water Out hoses

(Pressure)(Return)

Air IN

Page 109: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes 109

c. Refer to Illustration 4-11. Slide two hose clamps onto the Water IN and Water OUT hoses, at both the CSC and CSP connections.

d. Illustration 4-12 shows the CSC destinations for each of the lines.

e. Slide the clamp to within 1/2 inch of the end of the hose, and tighten it down with a flat blade screwdriver.

2. Table 4-1 lists the Cyclotron Supply Panel connections.

• Check off each hose as you connect it.

CAUTION Keep water hoses well away from the electronic cables. Moisture may con-dense on the hoses. Bundle the electronic cables, and dress them away from the hoses.

TABLE 4-1CYCLOTRON SUPPLY PANEL CONNECTIONS

Refer to Illustration 4-12, Air and Make Up water lines cross the top of the cabinet, run along the side, and enter the bottom half of the CSC, near the connection destinations.

When Installed

From Cyclotron Supply Panel To CSC Hose

Diameter Notes

Air In Air Manifold Assem-bly (V30)

3/8" Runs along top of cabinet, down the hinge side of the shield and enters cabinet along lower left side, to V30

Make Up Water Water Manifold (V50) 3/8" Runs along top of cabinet, down the hinge side of the shield and enters cabinet along lower left side, to V50

Water In Water Manifold (V1) 1" Enters cabinet on top, left connectorRefer to Illustration 4-12.Two Hose Clamps - both ends

Water Out Water Manifold 1" Enters cabinet on top, right connectorRefer to Illustration 4-12.Two Hose Clamps - both ends

Page 110: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

110 Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes

ILLUSTRATION 4-12CYCLOTRON SUPPORT CABINET - COOLING WATER SYSTEM

ILLUSTRATION 4-13WATER HOSE TO THE CSC

Air In (V30)

Make Up Water (V50)

Water In Water Out

Connection

Lines enter/exit

destinations

the CSC here

Two hose clamps for

Water OUT Line

extra security

Page 111: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes 111

ILLUSTRATION 4-14COOLING WATER CONNECTIONS (CAC212-31010)

Page 112: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

112 Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes

4-3-2 Attach the MINItrace Cooling Hoses

Note: Refer to Illustration 4-14. Run all the 3/8" rubber hoses in the exact order they appear in Table 4-2 . Do NOT cross or stack hoses, or they will not fit . All 3/8" hoses are cut to length, fitted with connectors and labeled at both ends. Run all the hoses at this time, and make as many connections as possible. Chapter 5 contains instructions to make the remaining connections to the Diffusion Pump and Target Cooling Manifold.

TABLE 4-23/8" RUBBER HOSE CONNECTIONS.

When Installed

Hose Label From the Water Manifold (CSC)/To

Max Length Notes

Target Dual Return Target Cooling Manifold 400cm Run to Target side of magnet

Target Single Return Target Cooling Manifold 360cm Run to Target side of magnet

Target Pressure Target Cooling Manifold 410cm Run to Target side of magnet

RF 2 Pressure Magnet (DEE 2) 380cm

RF 2 Return Magnet (DEE 2) 360cm

Magnet Pressure Magnet Coil 270cm

Magnet Return Magnet Coil 370cm

RF1 Pressure Magnet (DEE 1) 390cm

RF1 Return Magnet (DEE 2) 350cm

Ion Source Pressure Magnet Ion Source 310cm

Ion Source Return Magnet Ion Source 280cm

Vacuum Return Diffusion Pump (bottom) 270cm Connected in Chapter 5

Vacuum Pressure Diffusion Pump (top) 320cm Connected in Chapter 5

Page 113: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes 113

ILLUSTRATION 4-15RUN HOSES BENEATH THE MAGNET AND SHIELD

4-3-3 Attach the Electronics Cabinet Cooling Hoses

TABLE 4-3RUBBER HOSE (RH) CONNECTIONS TO ELECTRONICS CABINET

Fitted hoses cut to length

Support line races cast into

Hoses must lie flat,

bottom of shield and magnet

or they will cause

Target Side of the Magnet

and labeled

like a ribbon cable,

interference.

When Installed

From the Water Manifold (CSC) To Hose

Diameter Notes

RFPG Pressure RFPG cabinet - Water In

3/4" Pull in through the top of the cabinet. Attach to the WATER IN connector.

RFPG Return RFPG cabinet - Water Out

3/4" Pull in through the top of the cabinet. Attach to the top of the WATER OUT flow meter.

PSMC Pressure CCAB PSMC (connector on the left)

3/8" Pull in through the top of the cabinet. Connector should be labeled IN.

PSMC Return CCAB PSMC (right connector)

3/8" Pull in through the top of the cabinet.Attach to the OUT connector.

Page 114: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

114 Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes

ILLUSTRATION 4-16RFPG WATER IN AND WATER OUT

4-3-4 Polyurethane Connections

4-3-4-1 4mm Compressed Air Lines

The 4mm polyurethane tubes carry compressed air from the CSC to the:

• Air Valve Panel and LTF(s), mounted in the Target Support Cabinet (TSC).

• Backing and Roughing Valves, mounted on the diffusion pump.

The 4mm (or smaller) compressed air tubes use the fittings shown in Illustration 4-17.

1. Trim the end of the tube to produce an even edge.

2. Slide the end of the tube into the (blue) opening of the connector, until it butts against the shoulder on the inside.

3. Pull the shoulder away from the connector to lock the tube into place.

4. Press the blue shoulder against the connector to release the tube.

Water OUT(Return)

Water IN(Pressure)

Water OUT flow meter

Page 115: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes 115

ILLUSTRATION 4-17COMPRESSED AIR TUBE CONNECTIONS

Note: The LTF panels use similar compressed air fittings, but these should arrive intact.

ILLUSTRATION 4-18LTF PANEL

You may run the hose from the CSC to TSC at any time, but you must run the hose to the diffusion pump before you start to move the pump into place.

Refer to Illustration 4-12 on page 110. The CSP compressed air line enters the CSC on the left side of the cabinet, about half way down.

Blue shoulder

TSC cable raceway

The compressed air hose

Compressed air hose from CSC

attaches to the bottom of the LTF

Page 116: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

116 Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes

ILLUSTRATION 4-19COMPRESSED AIR VALVES IN CSC

TABLE 4-44MM POLYURETHANE (PU) CONNECTIONS

To magnet niche

To Target Support Cabinet

C1 tank

Push hose into this connector

Slide collar to open and close valve(Pull away from block to open valve;

push toward block to close valve.)

When Installed

From To Notes

CSC Air Valve labeled LTF TSC Run line through the shielded race-way to the top of the TSC, and into the integrated TSC raceway. Attach compressed air line to the bottom of the LTF panel.

CSC Air Valvelabeled VAC SYS

Right side of the magnet niche(Run the line now. You will attach it to the Diffusion Pump during Chapter 5)

The compressed air line follows the same path as the cooling hoses. Run the hose through the opening at the bottom of the CSC, beneath the right fixed shield and into the magnet niche.

Target Cooling Manifold 18F- Target (single extraction) Installed during Chapter 5

Target Cooling Manifold 13N Target option Installed during Chapter 5

Target Cooling Manifold 18F- Target (dual extraction) Installed during Chapter 5

Page 117: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes 117

4-3-5 Pull the Product Lines to the Hot Lab

Refer to the system Pipe Work drawing, site plans and Table 4-5 .

The tefzel lines that deliver the product to the hot labs have a finite life span, and must be periodically changed. During installation, run a set of 8 uniquely marked spares with every active product line. Depending upon the production schedule, these spares can last up to five years. The lines run through a plastic conduit with shallow bends, to facili-tate the future replacement of spares.

Note: Remember to mark the ends of each line before you pull the lines.

1. Fish a line through the conduits between the Cyclotron room and the Hot Lab.

2. Pull all the lines and spares between the rooms.

3. Decide which line(s) to you’ll use when you assemble the cyclotron, and label both ends with a piece of masking tape.

TABLE 4-5PRODUCT LINES

ILLUSTRATION 4-20WASTE GAS MANIFOLD

When Installed

From To Material Notes

Hot Lab Conduit Hot Lab 1/16" TefzelRefer to the system Pipe Work Drawing. Run 8 spares, for a total of 9 lines for each Target on the system.

Conduit for product lines

Waste gas enters shield here

Shield penetrations to TSC

and vents from the top.

Shown with fish line to to hot lab.

let into floor.

pull tefzel lines

Page 118: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

118 Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes

ILLUSTRATION 4-21: F-TARGET OPTION ASSEMBLY

Page 119: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes 119

4-3-6 Outlet Selection Panel

The outlet selection panel is used to divert incoming Target water (O16 or O18) to the synthesizer input, or to a waste vial.

Refer to Illustration 4-21. The panel consists of a selector valve, an air actuator and a valve holder, and is installed in the hot cell.

1. Mount the outlet valve panel close to the FDG box in the Hot cell.

2. Connect the product line from the target to the input of the selector valve.

3. Connect the input of the FDG box to the first outlet (OUT 1) of the selector valve.

4. Connect the second outlet (OUT 2) of the selector valve to a 250ml waste bottle.

5. Connect two air hoses between the pneumatic actuator and the pneumatic air valve assembly on the LTF panel on the cyclotron.

CAUTION Do NOT ty-wrap the compressed air lines to the product delivery lines.

ILLUSTRATION 4-22OUTLET SELECTION PANEL

In

Out 1

Out 2

Compressed Air Inputs to Pneumatic Actuator

Page 120: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

120 Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes

4-3-7 1/8" Stainless Steel Pipes

The gases travel from the Cyclotron Gas Panel to the MINItrace through stainless steel tubing you cut to length during installation. The system target options determine the number of pipes to install. Refer to the facility Pipe Work drawing and Table 4-6 for additional installation information.

A length of stainless steel tubing ships with the system. Choose a run between the Cyclotron Gas Panel and the MINItrace with the fewest bends and maximum support from walls and shield surfaces. Refer to Illustration 4-24. Use the cutting tool from the Installation Tool Box to cut the tubing to length.

ILLUSTRATION 4-23CYCLOTRON GAS PANEL

ILLUSTRATION 4-24CUTTING TOOL

H2 TO I.S. MANIF

CH4 TO LTF

He TO LTF

He TO He COOL

He TO LTF N2O2 TO LTF1.5bar 30bar

5bar

Page 121: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes 121

TABLE 4-61/8" STAINLESS STEEL (SS) CONNECTIONS

1. Determine the total number of pipes to run.

2. Measure the exact run between the Cyclotron Support Panel and MINItrace, includ-ing bends, and cut the tubing to length. Refer to Illustration 4-25.

a. Loosen the knob on the cutting tool.

b. Slip the tubing next to the cutting wheels and tighten the knob.

c. Spin the cutting tool around the tubing.

d. Continue to tighten the knob and spin the cutting tool around the tubing until it snaps. The tool makes a clean, burr-free cut, but the cutting process reduces the inner diameter of the tubing. (See Step 3.)

When Installed

Cyclotron Gas Supply Panel Label To Notes

H2 to I.S. MANIF Ion Source Manifold Panel in CSC

Pull through raceway to Ion Source panel in CSC. (Drill a hole in the raceway, near the access hole on top of the CSC) Attach to the top of the IS panel (Illustration 4-28)

Ion Source Manifold Ion Source, magnet (Continuation of run from H2 to I.S. MANIF) Start from the bottom of the IS panel and pull to the magnet.

CH4 TO LFT(13N option)

Liquid Target Filler Remove P1, P2, P3 to install lines to LTF.Line enters the top of the TSC and attaches to the LTF at ID1 V1

He TO He COOL 1.5bar Target Cooling Manifold

Changes to PEEK in cable raceway

He TO LTF 5bar Liquid Target Filler Remove P1, P2, P3 to install lines to LTF.Line enters the top of the TSC and attaches to the LTF at He 5BAR IN.

He TO LTF 30bar Liquid Target Filler Remove P1, P2, P3 to install lines to LTF.Line enters the top of the TSC and attaches to the LTF at He 30BAR IN.

N2O2 TO LTF (Future option)

Liquid Target Filler

Page 122: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

122 Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes

ILLUSTRATION 4-25CUT THE TUBING TO LENGTH

3. Use a 3mm drill bit to carefully restore the inner diameter of the steel tubing.

• IF POSSIBLE, hold the stainless steel piping upside down while you restore the inner diameter, to prevent any debris (swarf) from entering the tube.

• When you finish, tap the end of the tubing against a solid surface to knock out any debris that may have entered its interior.

4. Refer to Illustration 4-26. Take the time to make neat runs.

• Use the walls and shield to support the pipes as much as possible.

• To prevent accidents, keep runs to the MINItrace close to the ceiling.

ILLUSTRATION 4-26KEEP RUNS NEAT, SIMPLE AND FAR FROM THE FLOOR

5. Run the stainless tubing through the cable duct in the top of the TSC cabinet.

6. The pipes attach to the target panels with Swagelok connectors.

Page 123: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes 123

ILLUSTRATION 4-27TARGET PANEL CONNECTION

7. Refer to Table 4-6 and Illustration 4-28. The Helium cooling line to the Target Cool-ing Manifold changes to a PEEK connection in the shielded raceway.

• Chapter 5 contains the instructions to connect the PEEK tubes that run to the TCM.

ILLUSTRATION 4-28STAINLESS STEEL PIPES IN SHIELDED RACEWAY

Panel Connection

Steel piping transitions to

Access hole for pipe to I.S. Manifold

To I.S. Manifold in CSC

PEEK tubing in raceway.

Page 124: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

124 Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes

4-4 Cyclotron Room VentilationCheck that the ventilation from the vacuum side, and the waste gas outlet from the tar-get side are connected to the ventilation stack. Illustration 4-29 shows the ventilation and the waste gas outlet.

Notice Check that the Cyclotron room pressure is 15-20 pascal lower than the static pressure in the surrounding areas. The air flow in the ventilation pipe, from the vacuum side, should range between 100 to 150 liter/minute.

ILLUSTRATION 4-29VENTILATION AND WASTE GAS OUTLET

Waste gas outlet

Ventilation(vacuum side)

Page 125: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes 125

Notes and Comments:

Page 126: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

126 Chapter 4 —Install the Cables, Hoses and Pipes

Page 127: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron 127

CHAPTER 5 — ASSEMBLE THE CYCLOTRON

Follow the instructions in this chapter to complete the assembly and installation of the MINItrace cyclotron and support systems. This chapter also contains the instructions to repair and finish the shields. When you complete all the Chapter 5 procedures, the sys-tem is ready for power checks and start-up.

Note: Follow all the instructions in Chapter 4 before proceeding to Chapter 5 . After you complete the Chapter 4 tasks and prep the interior shield, two people may assem-ble the target and vacuum sides of the cyclotron simultaneously.

5-1 IntroductionThe MINItrace shields house the cyclotron and part of the target and vacuum support systems. The cabinets attached to the right and left fixed shields house additional cyclo-tron and target support systems. Any component that has the potential to become radioactive, either during normal use or catastrophic failure, is housed inside the shields.

Before you start to reassemble the cyclotron:

• Verify all cables and hoses from the CSC have been pulled into the interior niche. (Wait until you install the Target Cooling Manifold and Valve panel to pull the lines from the Liquid Target Filler and Helium Compressor in the TSC.)

• Repair any shipment damage to the interior surfaces. (Follow the application direc-tions on the can of plastic filler.)

• Paint the inner and outer shield surfaces (Continue to periodically paint and touch up the surfaces until satisfied with the finish.)

Notice Any time you paint the shields, cover any exposed components, cables or hoses with plas-tic. Wipe up or smooth out any drips as soon as you discover them. When you make the final door adjustments, the tolerances are so small that a dried paint drip can prevent the doors from closing. When you repair the damaged areas, sand the surfaces completely smooth before you paint them. Too much plastic filler (bond-o) will also cause problems during the final door adjustments.

Page 128: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

128 Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron

ILLUSTRATION 5-1INNER SHIELD ASSEMBLY

Page 129: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron 129

5-2 Assemble the Target Side of the Cyclotron

5-2-1 Install Inner Shield 5

The cyclotron ships with the magnet chamber filled with nitrogen gas. Release the gas, remove the valve, and cover the port with a blind flange before installing the last five inner plastic shields.

CAUTION The extraction motor assembly is fragile. Take care NOT to damage the extraction motor while installing the plastic inner shields.

1. Release the nitrogen gas and remove the pressure valve from the magnet port.

• GEMSE: Send the pressure valve back to Sweden with the rigging crate. GEMSAM and GEMSA: Contact your local office for return instructions.

2. Locate the blind flange in the hardware attached to the magnet.

3. Reuse the 6mm hardware to fasten the flange cover over the open port.

4. Fasten the right shield support bracket back into place.

• You removed this bracket during Section 3-3-5, to attach the hi-jacker.

5. Refer to Illustration 5-1 on page 128 while installing the plastic inner shield 5 marked 21 on page 128.

• The top of each shield was numbered during disassembly.

6. CAREFULLY place Shield 21 on the metal brackets and slide it into place, making sure the cutout completely clears the extraction motor (single extraction system) or motors (dual extraction system) and the attached cables.

7. Refer to Illustration 5-2. Shield 21 has wire raceways routed into the surface.

a. Locate the black filter board cable at the top of the coil (CAC 205-3101 01-3-3.2m)

b. Press the black cable into the top wire raceway, and down to the floor.

c. Press the single (Upper) extraction motor cable into the lower wire raceway.

* Refer to Illustration 5-2. Use a ty-wrap to position the cable in the niche.

Page 130: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

130 Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron

ILLUSTRATION 5-2SHIELD 21 AND UPPER (SINGLE) EXTRACTION MOTOR

8. Refer to Illustration 5-2. IF the system has the Dual Extraction option:

a. Position the DU and DL cables at the entrance to the raceway, and ty-wrap the two cables together.

b. Press the cables into the raceway.

ILLUSTRATION 5-3SHIELD 21 WITH DUAL EXTRACTION FOIL AND BALANCE MOTORS

Filter Board cable

Single Extraction motor (U)

Ty-wrap cable

Dual Extraction

Balance Motor (DL)

Foil Motor (DU)

Page 131: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron 131

TABLE 5-1FILTER BOARD AND EXTRACTION MOTOR CABLES

CAUTION Take care NOT to pinch the cables between the shields. Recommended: Tape strips of masking tape across the routed raceways to keep the cables in place while you install the remaining shields.

9. Slide the rest of the shields into place, in the following order:

a. Shield 7

b. Shield 5

c. Shield 6

d. Shield 22

10. Fasten the plastic shields to the fixed shield with 4 M8 (340mm) bolts.

ILLUSTRATION 5-4ALL INNER PLASTIC SHIELDS IN PLACE

When Installed

From

To Cyclotron Connection board on TCM(Target Cooling Manifold) Notes

Filter board P7 All MINItrace systems

Single Extraction Motor(Upper Motor)

P4 All MINItrace systems

Foil Motor (DU) P6 Dual Extraction systems only

Balance Motor (DL) P5 Dual Extraction systems only

Shield Race and Ports (detail)

Page 132: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

132 Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron

5-2-2 Install the Targets

Follow the procedure in this section to attach the targets to the ports on the cyclotron. The actual number of targets, and port locations vary from system to system, depend-ing upon the Target options that were purchased. Consult the packing list; the target options ship in Crate 11. Your MINItrace system pipe work drawing (Basic Drawing, CAC600-17000-00-1) shows the target locations for your system. The MINItrace system uses the following default port assignments, listed from top to bottom:

• Port 1: 18F- Single and Dual Extraction systems

• Port 2: 11C

• Port 3: 15O

• Port 4: 13N

• Port 5: Proton (Dummy) Target - all MINItrace systems

• Port 6: 18F- Dual Extraction systems

1. Remove the blind flange from the target mounting area(s).

ILLUSTRATION 5-5MINITRACE TARGET PORTS WITH BAYONET MOUNT IN PLACE

2. Refer to Illustration 5-6. Each product target is surrounded by a nylon shield.

• The dummy (proton) target does NOT have a nylon shield.

3. Slide target into shield and fasten cover with the captive nylon screw.

• The shield should spin freely around the target body.

Page 133: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron 133

ILLUSTRATION 5-6MINITRACE TARGET SHIELD

4. Refer to Illustration 5-7. Orient the shield with the nylon screw facing upward, and GENTLY insert the end of the target into the mounting plate.

• The targets mount onto the port with the media inlets on the top side of the target and the outlets on the bottom side of the target (nearest the floor).

ILLUSTRATION 5-7INSERT THE MINITRACE TARGET INTO THE PORT

5. Mount the dummy target into the fifth target position.

• The dummy target has connections for cooling water lines and the current sensing cable.

• The dummy target does NOT have helium cooling lines or PEEK connections.

6. Refer to Illustration 5-8. Fasten the filler blocks into the unused target openings.

• The blocks are labeled with the corresponding target port number.

• The target hoses are attached to the targets later, during section 5-2-6 on page 140.

Nylon screwTarget Inlets

Target Outlets

Page 134: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

134 Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron

ILLUSTRATION 5-8FILLER BLOCKS IN UNUSED PORTS

5-2-3 Target Support Cabinet (TSC)

The Target Support Cabinet (TSC) houses the helium compressor(s) used by the helium cooling system, and the Liquid Target Filler(s) used by the 18F- and 13N Target systems. The TSC also contains space to house future Target system product panels, such as 15O and 11C. The Liquid Target Filler (LTF) panel should arrive already attached to the TSC. During system disassembly for shipment, the lines that run from the LTF were pulled back into the TSC, but left attached to the LTF panel.

Filler Blocks Labeled with Target Port #

Page 135: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron 135

5-2-4 Install the Helium Compressor(s)

The MINItrace currently uses a single compressor on a single extraction system, and two compressors if the system has the Dual Extraction option.

1. Refer to Illustration 5-9. Each compressor sits on a shelf attached to a bracket that fastens directly to the shield. The bracket hardware passes through openings in the back of the TSC and fastens to anchors imbedded in the shield.

ILLUSTRATION 5-9HELIUM COMPRESSOR SHELVES (DUAL EXTRACTION SYSTEM)

2. Fasten the bracket to the shield with four M6 bolts and flat washers.

3. Refer to Illustration 5-10. Install the mounting plate (shelf) with the studs facing upward. Temporarily fasten the mounting hardware to align the shelf to the bracket.

a. Insert the mounting hardware from the bottom, making sure it slides into the slot in the shelf bracket.

b. Insert the spacer and loosely fasten into place with the black knurled knob.

TSC Cable Raceway

Penetrations for the

Bracket for shelvesGround stud (in raceway)

compressor hoses

Page 136: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

136 Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron

ILLUSTRATION 5-10INSTALL THE MOUNTING PLATE

4. The compressor power cable originates in the CSC, and arrives still connected to its terminal in that cabinet.

a. Locate the power cable in the raceway on the CSC side of the shield. (You should have placed all the cables into the raceway when you attached the CSC and raceway to the shield.)

b. Run the power cable along the race, through the penetration at the TSC side of the shield, and down the plastic raceway inside the TSC.

c. Refer to Illustration 5-9. Locate the ground stud at the bottom of the TSC race-way. The compressor ground wires should already be fastened to the stud.

d. Pull the ground wires from the raceway.

5. The compressors are shipped in Crate 11 (Single Extraction in box C and Dual Extraction option in box D) and should already have the 3/8" PU hoses attached.

a. Refer to Illustration 5-11. Attach a ground wire to each pump case.

ILLUSTRATION 5-11ATTACH THE GROUND WIRE TO THE COMPRESSOR CASE

b. Orient the compressor so the ground wire faces the front or rear of the TSC.

Install mounting plate

Lower set of penetrations

with studs facing upward

Spacer

from below Fasten hardware

Page 137: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron 137

6. The pumps have rubber vibration absorbing feet, with metal mounting tabs.

a. Refer to Illustration 5-12. Remove the black knobs and mounting hardware.

b. Slip the back tabs over the exposed studs and align the front tabs over the holes and slots at the front of the shelf.

c. Insert the screw through the shelf and mounting tab, slide the spacer onto the screw and fasten everything into place with the black knob.

ILLUSTRATION 5-12FRONT FOOT AND MOUNTING TAB

5-2-5 Attach the Helium Compressor Hoses

After you install the helium compressors and the Target Cooling Manifold (section 5-2-6), attach the hoses listed in Table 5-2 . The compressors ship with their hoses attached. Refer to Illustration 5-9. Run the pressure hose (arrow points away from compressor) through the bottom penetration. Run the return hose (arrow points toward compressor) through the top penetration.

The hoses use Swagelok connectors. Appendix B contains information about Swagelok connectors. If you have to manufacture or refit one of the hoses, first read the informa-tion in section B-1.

Page 138: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

138 Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron

ILLUSTRATION 5-13DUAL COMPRESSOR CONFIGURATION

TABLE 5-23/8" POLYURETHANE (PU) CONNECTIONS

When Installed

From To Notes

Helium Compressor#1 Target Cooling Manifold Single and dual beam systems

Helium Compressor#2 He Compressor #1Dual Extraction system only. Drawing CAC 208-31004-03-1 has an inset showing the dual compressor configuration.

Target Cooling Manifold He Compressor Return

Page 139: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron 139

ILLUSTRATION 5-14PIPE WORK MINITRACE BASIC DRAWING

Page 140: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

140 Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron

5-2-6 Install the Valve Panel and Target Cooling Manifold

The Target Cooling Manifold provides cooling media to the targets. It also contains the Cyclotron Connection board and Relay panel. The Valve Panel contains the valves to move the media into the target for bombardment, pressurize the target, then flush and dry it .The Valve Panel and Target Cooling Manifold ship in Crate 11.The Valve Panel ships in box N; the TCM sits next to the Diffusion Pump. Illustration 4-14 on page 111 shows the cooling water connection locations and labels.

ILLUSTRATION 5-15THE VALVE PANEL AND THE TARGET COOLING MANIFOLD

Notice For best results, DO NOT push all the tubes/lines through at once. Push and connect one tube/line at a time to prevent confusion. Leave about 0.5 to 1 meter length of slack tube/line inside the magnet chamber, to provide service access.

ILLUSTRATION 5-16TSC AND SHIELD PENETRATIONS BELOW THE LTF PANEL

Valve Panel(New Style) Target Cooling Manifold

Leave enough slack tomove the manifold forservice access.

TSC/Shield penetrationsPush and connect one tube/line at a time.

Page 141: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron 141

1. Make the tube connections between the LTF panel and the valve panel.All destina-tion valve connectors on the Valve Panel are clearly marked with the same label names as the source connectors on the LTF, but the tubes are not labeled.

a. Choose an LTF source connection and push its tube through the TSC/shield penetration.

b. Cut a 5-10 mm piece from the end of the tube, to remove any dirt that may have entered it when you pushed the tube through the shielding.

c. Connect the tube to the destination connector.

2. Refer to Illustration 5-14 on page 139. Make the tefzel line(s) between the LTF panel and the corresponding valve panel connector.

a. Choose an LTF source connection and push its tube through the TSC/shield penetration.

b. Cut a 5-10 mm piece from the end of the tube, to remove any dirt that may have entered it when you pushed the tube through the shielding.

c. Connect the tube to the destination connector.

CAUTION DO NOT bend the PEEK lines, or they may crack. The PEEK lines between the target and the LTF are supposed to be 2 meters long. DO NOT cut these lines.

Information about PEEK Connections

The 18F- and 13N Target systems use PEEK tubes between the Liquid Target Filler and the Target. The LTF also has additional PEEK tubing and connections. Usually, the 1/16" PEEK tube uses the same Swagelok connectors as the 1/16" Tefzel tubes (See Appendix B), but the PEEK tubes also use connections like the one shown in Illustration 5-17, to provide a quick method to disconnect the Target lines from the LTF. The LTF vials also use needles with a similar fitting.

Page 142: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

142 Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron

ILLUSTRATION 5-17INSTALL PEEK CONNECTIONS

3. Make the PEEK line connections between the LTF and the valve panel. Refer to Illustration 5-14 on 139, and read the information about Peek Connections below.

a. Choose an LTF source connection and push its tube through the TSC/shield penetration.

b. Cut a 5-10 mm piece from the end of the tube, to remove any dirt that may have entered it when you pushed the tube through the shielding.

c. Connect the tube to the destination connector.

4. Make the PEEK line connections between the valve panel and the target(s).

a. Press the PEEK tubes into the routed races, behind the beveled screws. Refer to Illustration 5-18. When tightened into place, the screws act as retainers.

ILLUSTRATION 5-18SCREWS ACT AS RETAINERS

Insert the tube into the connector, until it passes the shoulder inside the tip, and extends beyond the outer tip of the connector by a millimeter or two.

Insert the tube here

Tube extends 1 or 2mm past tip

Screw the threaded end of the connector into the coupling or threaded LTF

Screw threaded tips into coupling

component and tighten it with your fingers.

Screws act as retainers

Page 143: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron 143

5. Refer to Illustration 5-19. Fasten the valve panel to the side of the fixed shield with the two black knurled knobs.

ILLUSTRATION 5-19SINGLE EXTRACTION VALVE PANEL AND TARGET COOLING MANIFOLD

6. The Target Cooling Manifold (TCM) sits directly on the floor.

• Leave enough slack on the tubes and cables to service the TCM.

7. Refer to Drawing CAC208-31004-03-1 (Direction 2233001).

a. Make the cooling water hose connections. (Refer to Table 4-2 on page 112.)

b. Make the Helium compressor connections. (Refer to Table 5-2 on page 138.)

c. Make the Single Extraction motor (U) cable connection. (Table 5-1 on page 131.)

d. Make the filter board connection. (Table 5-1 on page 131.)

e. IF the MINItrace has the Dual Extraction Option: Make the Foil motor (DU) and Balance motor (DL) cable connections. (Table 5-1 on page 131.)

f. Attach the cables from the CSC Connector and Relay board to TCM P1, P2 and P3.

* Refer to Cable Block Diagram CAC000-51003-00-3

g. Attach the magnet door interlock cable from the cyclotron to PC4.

* Insert the blue wire into terminal 9.

* Insert the black wire into terminal 10.

h. Refer to Illustration 5-20. Attach the Waste Gas Manifold inlet tube to the WASTE OUT connection on the Target Cooling Manifold.

i. Run the PEEK tube attached to the TCM He IN connector to the Stainless Steel pipe in the raceway. (See Illustration 4-27 on page 123.) Refer to Appendix B to fit the Swagelok connector to the pipe.

Valve Panel

3/8" hoses from helium compressor

Shield penetration between LTF (in TSC) and Valve Panel

Page 144: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

144 Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron

ILLUSTRATION 5-20WASTE GAS MANIFOLD

8. The Target Cooling tubing and current sensor lines for each of the MINItrace Tar-gets are attached to the Target Cooling Manifold.

• The current sensor lines arrive attached to PC5 on the TCM connection board.

• Compare the position of the targets on the cyclotron with the tubing configu-ration on the TCM. The two should match.

• The TCM in Illustration 5-21 is configured for a Dual Extraction system. (This picture taken before port five became the permanent default Proton [Dummy] Target position.)

ILLUSTRATION 5-21TARGET COOLING MANIFOLD BEFORE INSTALLATION

Waste gas inlet

Target 6 Target 1

Target current sensing lines Target Cooling tubing

Page 145: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron 145

9. Refer to Illustration 5-22. Press the Target media lines into their routed raceway.

10. Attach the media lines to the corresponding target connector.

11. Route each Target Current Sensor wire behind the retaining screws.

• Wait until you install the PEEK lines to tighten the screws.

• If necessary, use strips of masking tape to hold the lines in place.

ILLUSTRATION 5-22ROUTE THE TARGET LINES IN THE SHIELD RACEWAYS

Retaining screws keep the lines in place.

Current Sensor line

Page 146: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

146 Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron

5-2-7 Paint the Inner Doors

ILLUSTRATION 5-23PAINT THE DOOR

5-2-8 Attach Outer Shield Assemblies to Left Door

Attach the outer plastic shields to the left door.

All the inner and outer plastic shields ship in Crate 11.

1. Refer to Illustration 5-24. Tighten the following lengths of M12 all-thread all the way into the holes tapped into the lead shielding on the left door.

a. Fasten the longer piece (240mm) into the top hole.

b. Faster the shorter piece (226mm) into the bottom hole.

Paint the door before you installthe outer plastic shields.

Page 147: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron 147

ILLUSTRATION 5-24FASTEN THE M12 ALL-THREAD TO THE SHIELD DOOR

2. Each outer plastic shield is slightly smaller than the previous one, to form a stepped surface. The top of each shield is numbered with its call-out on CAC210-31005-05-2.

3. Slide the shields onto the all-thread in the following order:

a. Shield 20

b. Shield 19

c. Shield 18

d. Shield 17

e. Shield 16

4. Slide a washer onto each thread, and fasten the outer shields to the door with M12 nuts.

5. Refer to Illustration 5-25. Make sure the ends of the thread and nuts are flush with the outer surface of the last plastic shield.

• If the hardware sticks out, the door will NOT close.

• If the hardware extends past the shield surface, make sure you didn’t fasten the longer thread to the bottom hole by mistake.

240 mm

226 mm

Page 148: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

148 Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron

ILLUSTRATION 5-25MOUNTING HARDWARE SHOULD BE FLUSH

6. Make the PEEK line connections between the valve panel and the targets

7. Refer to system drawing CAC 285-31010-xx-1

TABLE 5-3LIST OF PEEK CONNECTIONS

When Installed

From To Notes

LTF 18F- Target(s) Two lines for each 18F- Target on system

LTF 13N Target Two lines

Page 149: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron 149

5-3 Assemble the Vacuum Side of the Cyclotron

5-3-1 Attach the Diffusion Pump to the Accelerator

Follow the instructions in this section to attach the Diffusion and Rotary pumps to the accelerator. Make sure all hoses and cables have been pulled through the shield pene-trations and races. Ty-wrap the signal and power cables into bundles in the race way, and install the race covers before moving the diffusion pump into the cavity.

1. Refer to Illustration 5-26. The diffusion pump ships fully assembled and ready to install. When you pull it out of Crate 11, inspect the bottom of the crate and the dif-fusion pump pallet for signs of an oil leak.

• If you see any oil, call support. Service Manual 2233000 contains instructions to disassemble and fill the diffusion pump with SANTOVAC 5 diffusion pump oil.

ILLUSTRATION 5-26DIFFUSION PUMP

2. Locate the square metal roller plate (dolly) in the installation gang box.

3. Remove the diffusion pump from its shipping pallet and transfer it to the roller plate.

• Use the roller plate to transport the diffusion pump to the cyclotron room and position it for attachment to the vacuum chamber.

4. Refer to Illustration 5-27. Use an 8mm allen wrench to remove the six M10 hex cap head screws that fasten the blind flange to the cyclotron magnet chamber.

• Remove the blind flange, and set aside.

Page 150: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

150 Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron

Note: If necessary, loosen the power cables and hoses and push them out of the way while you install the diffusion pump. REMEMBER to reposition and fasten them when you finish.

ILLUSTRATION 5-27CYCLOTRON WITH BLIND FLANGE

CAUTION Do not do ANYTHING to damage the o-ring area. A single nick, scratch or hair across the area will cause vacuum to fail. PAY attention to everything you do, it could take days to find the source of the vacuum leak, and hours of wet sanding with 1000-1200 grit sandpaper to resolve.

5. Refer to Illustration 5-28.

a. Remove the guide pins from the bag of hardware attached to the bottom of the flange.

b. Replace the hardware you removed from the upper right and left hole with the guide pins.

If necessary, loosen the cooling hoses

Blind Flange

The system ships a bag of installationhardware taped to the bottom of the flange.

Insert guide pins

and move them out of the way during thediffusion pump installation

Page 151: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron 151

ILLUSTRATION 5-28DIFFUSION PUMP INSTALLATION KIT

6. Refer to Illustration 5-29. Remove the protective cover from the diffusion pump chamber.

a. Apply a thin layer of vacuum grease to the o-ring.

b. Run your finger over the o-ring to seat it in its groove.

c. Run your finger lightly over the copper spring to seat it in its groove.

ILLUSTRATION 5-29DIFFUSION PUMP O-RING

7. Move the diffusion pump into the niche, and shift it onto the guide pins.

8. Insert cap head screws into the four remaining holes and fasten them into place.

9. Remove the two guide pins and replace them with cap head screws

10. Refer to Illustration 5-28. Use the modified allen wrench (packed with the guide pins and diffusion pump hardware) to fasten the upper right cap head screws.

• Snug down all six screws as tightly as possible.

Make sure the rubber o-ring andcopper spring are seated in theirgrooves. Make sure the ends of the copper spring are firmly seated.

Page 152: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

152 Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron

11. Attach the cooling water hoses to the diffusion pump.

a. Attach the inlet (pressure) hose to the top of the pump.

b. Attach the outlet (return) hose to the bottom of the pump.

12. Refer to Illustration 5-30. Attach the compressed air lines from the C1 block in the CSC.

a. Run the line from HVV on the C1 block to the connector on the back of the High Vacuum Valve (HVV).

b. Run the line from VAC S. on the C1 block to the T-connector on the front of the Backing Valve (BV).

Note: If you loosened and moved the power cables and hoses, move them into place and fasten into position before you move to the next step. Check all vacuum chamber connections.

13. Refer to the Cable List in Appendix A and Illustration 5-30.

• Fasten the 10 cables from MIS run 1b to the Diffusion Pump components. (The 11th cable attaches to the rotary pump, and the 12th cable in the group attaches to the Magnet Coil Temperature switches.)

• All signal cables are clearly marked; make the connections and ty-wrap into place, so the cables do not touch the hot surfaces of the diffusion pump.

ILLUSTRATION 5-30DIFFUSION PUMP AND ROUGHING VACUUM PUMP

14. Refer to the Cable List in Appendix A, Illustration 5-30 and Illustration 5-31.

a. The DP Temp Switch cable ends in a temperature sensor.

Penning Cell

Pirani Cell 2

Vacuum Valve (VV)

Roughing Valve (RV)

Pirani Cell 1

Rotary pump (RP)

DP Temp Sensor

(attached to end of vacuum chamber)

High Vacuum Valve (HVV)

High Vacuum Valve Switch (HVV SW)

Backing Valve (BV)DP 4 pin plug

Magnet CoilTemp Switches

(side of box nearest shield)

Page 153: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron 153

b. Use a 3mm allen wrench to remove the DP Temp Switch cap from the bottom of the Diffusion pump. Insert the cable through the hole in the cap.

c. Apply a coat of thermal coupling compound to the stud and the tab end of the temperature sensor.

d. Insert the temperature sensor over the stud in the cap.

e. Fasten the cap back into place.

ILLUSTRATION 5-31DP TEMP SWITCH

15. Refer to Illustration 5-32. Check the oil level in the rotary pump, It should fall between the two markings on the site glass.

• Service Manual 2233000 contains instructions to fill the pump with oil.

ILLUSTRATION 5-32ROTARY PUMP SITE GLASS

16. The diffusion pump ships with a flexible hose and clamping collar attached to the top of the Roughing Valve (RV) assembly.

TemperatureSensor

Switch to 0 for normal operation

Site glass

Page 154: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

154 Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron

• Apply a light coating of vacuum grease to the o-ring.

• Refer to Illustration 5-33. Use the clamping collar to clamp the flexible hose to the elbow on the inlet.

17. Plug the rotary pump power cord into its MIS 1b cable and lock.

18. Refer to Illustration 5-32. Set the circulating pump switch to the 0 position.

19. Slide the rotary pump into place in the inner shield cavity. (Illustration 5-30.)

ILLUSTRATION 5-33ROTARY PUMP READY TO INSTALL

Vacuum flangeExhaust flange

Clamping collars

Page 155: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron 155

5-4 Finish the Cyclotron Installation

5-4-1 Final Door Adjustments

If you followed the directions in section 3-5-5 of Chapter 3, the doors should be fairly well adjusted, and should have had time to settle while you installed the cables and hoses.

1. Remove the wedges from the doors.

2. Push and pull on each door and watch its motion.

• Ideally, the door should stop when you stop applying pressure.

• If the door tends to drift , it should drift TOWARD the fixed shield, NOT away from the fixed shield.

• If the door drifts, it should NOT gain momentum as it moves; it should NOT slam into the fixed shield.

• The door should NOT make contact with the cyclotron.

• The door should rest against the fixed shield without striking it, leaving a 1 or 2mm gap between the inner surface of the door and the fixed shield.

3. If the door fails to meet the Step 2 criteria, adjust the bearing assembly.

• Recommended: Use the modified diffusion pump wrench to adjust the threads nearest the hinge. (See Illustration 5-28 on page 151.)

4. Refer to Illustration 5-34. Attach the Lift Plate to the end of the door opposite the hinges, and use the remote jack to take the weight off the hinges.

ILLUSTRATION 5-34LIFT PLATE AND REMOTE JACK

• To pull the door away from the fixed shields: Loosen the nuts and adjust the threads

• To push the door toward the shield: Adjust the threads without the nuts,.

Note: If you become "lost or confused" adjust the pusher and puller threads to align the scribe marks on the top and bottom hinge and bearing assemblies, and start again.

If necessary, use pieces of steel plate to raise the remote jack into position.

Page 156: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

156 Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron

5. Release the remote jack and try the door again.

6. When satisfied with the door motion, adjust the eccentric to fit the door to the shield.

• Take the weight off the hinges, and align the scribe marks on the eccentric to the mark(s) on the hinge race

• If necessary, continue to adjust the eccentric until the door fits evenly against the shield, leaving about a 1 or 2mm gap between the two surfaces.

7. After you fine tune both doors, try closing them together.

• Make sure the two doors DO NOT collide.

• When closed, the door surfaces should be flush, with a 1 or 2mm gap between them.

Right and Left Shield Doors adjusted.

5-4-2 Install Right and Left Cosmetic Covers

The Cosmetic covers consist of two metal brackets and a vinyl cover. The brackets fas-ten to the shield and support cabinets to cover the hinge.

Note: Remove the CSC door to install the right cosmetic cover. Remove the three cotter pins that fasten the CSC door to its hinges.

1. The right and left cosmetic covers and hardware ship in Crate 7.

2. Tightly fasten the M8 all-thread (guide pin) to the tapped holes in the shield doors.

3. Fasten the cosmetic cover to the shield door with M8 hardware. (flat washer and nut)

• If the cover doesn’t fit , build up the guide pins with one or two washers.

ILLUSTRATION 5-35ALL-THREAD ACTS AS GUIDE PIN

Guide pin

Page 157: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron 157

4. Stretch the cover across the gap between the door and support cabinet.

5. From the interior of the cabinet, fasten the cover into place with the rest of the M8 hardware.

6. Close the doors to make sure the cover isn’t too tight.

7. Reattach the Cyclotron Support Cabinet (CSC) door.

ILLUSTRATION 5-36MAKE SURE THE COVER ISN’T TOO TIGHT

5-4-3 Fill the Cosmetic Cover Gaps and Door Picking Point

You may have to apply multiple coats of filler over a period of days. Use the grinder from the gang box to smooth the filler between coats. Sand the surfaces smooth before you paint them.

Notice Do NOT fill the gaps between the cosmetic covers and shield surfaces until you are SURE the door hinges are correctly adjusted.

Refer to Illustration 5-37. Use caulk and/or plastic filler ("bond-o) to fill the gaps between the cosmetic covers and the shields. You may have to apply multiple coats over a period of days.

Page 158: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

158 Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron

ILLUSTRATION 5-37FILL THE GAPS BETWEEN THE SHIELDS AND THE COSMETIC COVERS

Refer to Illustration 5-38. Fill the front holes used as picking points for the doors during the rigging process. You don’t have to fill the hole directly on top of the door, because it is more difficult to see from a standing position in front of the door.

Refer to Illustration 5-38. Locate the four styrofoam filler pieces and insert them into the front holes on the doors. Apply a layer of plastic filler over the styrofoam pieces, to fill any remaining gaps between the picking point hole and the filler piece.

Page 159: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron 159

ILLUSTRATION 5-38FILL THE HOLES TOWARD THE FRONT OF EACH DOOR.

Picking Point holes filled.

Cosmetic Cover Gaps filled.

Fill the most visible picking point hole

You DO NOT have to fill

Door Sensor Block

this less visible hole

Fill this hole

on each door with cardboard or styrofoam and layers of plastic filler.

Page 160: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

160 Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron

5-4-4 Final Cleanup and Repair of Damage

The shields will suffer damage during shipment in the containers. Purchase cleaning supplies locally. The system ships with a box of damage repair and paint supplies. Also check the gang box for additional tools and supplies.

1. Clean all surface dirt and debris from the interior and exterior shield and cyclotron.

2. Follow the instructions on the can of "Plastic Padding" ("bond-o") to mix the two-part compound and fill in any scrapes, divots and chips.

• If the damage is deep, you may have to apply multiple coats over a period of days.

3. After the plastic filler dries, sand it smooth.

5-4-5 Final Touch-up of Outer Shield Surfaces

Sand any rough spots or dried paint drips. Check all surfaces and fill any remaining nicks or scratches. Apply the final coat of paint to the inner and outer shield surfaces.

1. The system or gang box ships with three 2.5 liter buckets of white paint, enough to apply two or three coats to the exposed areas of the magnet and shields.

• The paint is water-based, and dries to the touch in about 30 minutes. For best results prop the doors open, and wait at least 12 hours between coats. Apply the final coat at least a day before you attach the labels.

2. After the final coat dries, open and close the shield doors to make sure they still fit correctly, and don’t make contact with the cyclotron when you close them.

3. Check the gap between the doors. The door surfaces should remain flush.

5-4-6 Install Warning Lights and Door Sensors

The warning light and door sensors are attached to a single mounting plate and ship with the cables in Crate 7, with the cables already attached. The metal blocks that mount on the shield doors ship with the warning light assembly.

1. Use the attached hardware to fasten the Warning Light assembly to the shield.

2. Refer to Illustration 5-39. Run the cables through the raceway to the CSC.

Page 161: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron 161

ILLUSTRATION 5-39WARNING LIGHT AND DOOR SENSOR LOCATION

3. Refer to the Drawing CAC200-52004-00-2 and the Cable list in Appendix A to fasten the cable to the CSC Accelerator Support Connector board.

4. Refer to Illustration 5-38 and Illustration 5-40.

a. Fasten the metal blocks to the tapped holes in each door.

b. Close the door and push the block forward until it makes the microswitch, then tighten the hardware into place.

ILLUSTRATION 5-40WARNING LIGHT AND DOOR SENSOR MICROSWITCHES (FRONT AND SIDE VIEW)

A sensor block mounts on each door.Close the door and adjust the blockto make the microswitch.

Page 162: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

162 Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron

5-4-7 Install the Right and Left Door Motors

The right and left shield doors have motors to assist them to open and close. The door controls reside on a pendant that attaches to a panel in the CSC.

1. Drop each shield door motor into the holes in the top of the shield and the door.

ILLUSTRATION 5-41DOOR MOTOR IN PLACE

2. The shielded raceway has holes drilled into it for the cables.

• Make sure the holes have rubber grommets in place to protect the cable.

3. Run the cables through the shielded raceway to the CSC.

4. Refer to the Drawing CAC200-52004-00-2 and the Cable list in Appendix A to fasten the cables to the CSC Accelerator Support Connector board.

ILLUSTRATION 5-42DOOR MOTOR CABLE AND RACEWAY

5. Locate the Door Control Pendant and plug it into its connector on the CSC panel.

6. Refer to Illustration 5-43. Install all raceway covers.

Protect the cables from damage by inserting a rubber grommet or strain relief into the access hole in the raceway.

Page 163: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron 163

ILLUSTRATION 5-43INSTALL ALL RACEWAY COVERS

5-4-8 Touch-up Scratches - Paint Electronics Cabinet Surfaces

Use the shield paint to touch up any scratches to the CCAB and RFPG.

If necessary, mask off the labels and/or remove hardware and paint the cabinet sur-faces.

5-4-9 Attach the Shield Door Handles

The shield door handles consist of two pieces of 182cm conduit, with four holes drilled through each piece. The handles are anchored to the shield surface through standoffs.

The shield door hardware ships with the handles. (Also refer to Illustration 5-45.)

• Remember to place a flat washer against the shield surface before anchoring the standoff and handle to the door.

Page 164: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

164 Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron

ILLUSTRATION 5-44SHIELD DOOR HANDLES

5-4-10 Attach System Labels

1. Clean off the system components; remove any dirt or marks.

2. Repair any paint scratches, and let dry.

3. Locate the packet of system labels that shipped in Crate 11.

• If present, use the drawing packed with the labels as a guide.

• Otherwise, refer to Drawing CAC000-31010-03-2, and parts list CAC000-36010, located in Direction 2233001. (The parts lists are located at the back of the manual.)

Door anchors pass

Flat WasherStandoff

through standoffs

Page 165: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron 165

ILLUSTRATION 5-45MINITRACE DOOR LABEL LOCATIONS

Page 166: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

166 Chapter 5 —Assemble the Cyclotron

Page 167: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 6 —System Phase and Power Checks 167

CHAPTER 6 — SYSTEM PHASE AND POWER CHECKS

Follow the instructions in this chapter to check the phase of the power into and out of the Mains Distribution Panel and PDU, as well as the phasing and power inputs to the subsystems.

CAUTION The MINItrace subsystem has two phase sensitive components, the Rotary pump and the SWCU pump. If you apply power and run the pump and motor with the phases swapped, you will damage or destroy them. NEVER apply power to a MINItrace subsystem until you are sure the input power and phasing has been verified. If necessary, ohm out the wiring to the subsystem in question, and correct any cabling errors before you apply power to the component.

6-1 Input PowerThe RFPG and CCAB can accept input voltages of 208VAC, 400VAC or 480VAC. The MINI-trace Service Manual has a Generic Mains Distribution Drawing, CAA209-56001-xx-2, which currently applies to all three input voltages.

Measure the power into the Mains Distribution Panel (MDP) to determine which voltage this site uses.

In addition to the MDP circuit breakers, the customer provides one standard power out-let for the MASTER and one for the optional FDG mini lab, if present.

6-2 MASTER Power ChecksStandard power outlet for MASTER present?

Check the outlet voltage. Does it match the value on the drawing?

Page 168: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

168 Chapter 6 —System Phase and Power Checks

6-3 Mains Distribution Panel (MDP) Power ChecksCheck that the power rating for the RFPG and CCAB circuit breakers are at least 20kVA.

1. Turn OFF all circuit breakers in the back of the CCAB and in the CSC.

2. Open the lower front cover on the RFPG and turn off SW1.

3. Use an oscilloscope or phase sequence analyzer to check the L1, L2,L3 voltage and the phase relationships of the incoming power to the MDP.

• If necessary, correct any cabling errors at the source.

4. Record the voltages in Table 6-1 .

• The MDP has 4 circuit breakers for the standard MINItrace system.

TABLE 6-1MAINS POWER INPUTS

The customer supplies the MDP, so its design will vary from site to site. Illustration 6-1 shows an example of an interior view from a site. Recommended: To prevent confusion, label the front and back of each Circuit Breaker.

ILLUSTRATION 6-1MAINS DISTRIBUTION PANEL (AN EXAMPLE OF AN INTERIOR VIEW FROM A SITE)

Circuit Breaker# Power to L1/L2 L1/L3 L2/L3 L1/N L2/N L3/N

MAIN CB

CONT 1

CB1 RFPG

CB2 CCAB

CB5 Emergency Off

To prevent confusion, label MDP circuit breakers

Page 169: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 6 —System Phase and Power Checks 169

6-4 CCAB Power ChecksThe MDP supplies power to the CCAB. The CCAB supplies 400VAC (three phase) and 230VAC (single phase) to the Cyclotron Support Cabinet (CSC) and subsystems within the CCAB and RFPG cabinets. The CSC supplies power to the Cyclotron support subsystems, such as the diffusion pump and Vacuum Control Unit (VCU)

1. Turn off the CCAB main power switch on the MDP.

2. Check that the CCAB transformer is configured to the facility MDP input power:

a. Refer to Illustration 6-3. Open the front and rear CCAB doors.

b. Remove the interior front protective panel to expose the transformer inputs.

c. Refer to Illustration 6-4. Make sure the taps are configured for the on site volt-age. (The site electrician should make incoming power connections from the MDP.)

3. Check the connections between MDP CB1 and CCAB L1, L2, L3 and ground.

4. Turn on MDP CB1 to apply power to the CCAB.

5. Measure the voltage to the transformer.

• Make sure the L1, L2, L3 power equals the tapped value between phases.

6. Measure the transformer output voltage.

• Verify the transformer output measures 400VAC between phases.

7. Check the incoming voltage to each circuit breaker in the back of the CCAB.

• Verify the input to each circuit breaker except the PSARC equals 400VAC.

• Verify the input to the PSARC measures 208VAC.

8. Use an oscilloscope or phase sequence analyzer to check the L1, L2, L3 phase rela-tionships. If necessary, correct any cabling errors at the source.

ILLUSTRATION 6-2CCAB CIRCUIT BREAKERS

208VAC input 400VAC input

Page 170: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

170 Chapter 6 —System Phase and Power Checks

ILLUSTRATION 6-3CCAB TRANSFORMER

ILLUSTRATION 6-4CCAB TRANSFORMER TAP CONFIGURATIONS

480480480400400400208208208

208208208400400400N

PE

L3L2L1N

PE From MDP

480480480400400400208208208

208208208400400400N

PE

L3L2L1N

PE From MDP

480480480400400400208208208

208208208400400400N

PE

L3L2L1N

PE From MDP

480VAC from MDP 400VAC from MDP 208VAC from MDP

Page 171: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 6 —System Phase and Power Checks 171

6-5 PSMC Power ChecksThe CCAB circuit breaker provides power to the PSMC.

1. Refer to Illustration 6-5. Check the power cable connections between the CCAB cir-cuit breakers and the PSMC.

2. Turn off the PSMC main power switch on the back of the CCAB.

3. Measure the power to the PSMC circuit breaker in the CCAB.

• Check the box if the input power matches the value in Table 6-1 .

4. Use an oscilloscope or phase sequence analyzer to check the L1, L2, L3 phase rela-tionships. If necessary, correct any cabling errors at the source.

ILLUSTRATION 6-5CCAB CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Page 172: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

172 Chapter 6 —System Phase and Power Checks

6-6 RFPG Power Checks

CAUTION The RFPG has two different power sources. The MDP panel provides the power connection for the High Voltage circuitry. The CCAB provides the 230VAC to the rest of the components. Whenever you work on the RFPG, remember to turn off the MDP circuit breaker AND the circuit breaker in the back of the CCAB.

1. Remove the front lower panel from the RFPG.

2. Check power cable connections between MDP CB2 and RFPG L1, L2, L3 and ground.

3. Turn off the RFPG main power switch, located in the center of the lower front panel.

4. Turn on MDP CB2 to apply power to RFPG.

5. Measure the L1, L2, L3 power into the RFPG.

• Check the box if the input power matches the value in Table 6-1 .

6. Remove the lower back cover to the RFPG.

7. Refer to Appendix G. Compare the tapping configuration on the transformer with the configuration in Appendix G.

8. Use an oscilloscope or phase sequence analyzer to check the L1, L2, L3 phase rela-tionships. If necessary, correct any cabling errors at the source.

9. Turn ON the RFPG main power switch.

10. Replace the front and rear covers.

Page 173: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 6 —System Phase and Power Checks 173

6-7 Emergency Power Off Checks

CAUTION Although the Master System is normally NOT powered by a phase passing the Emergency Power Off Circuit Breaker, always shut down the entire Cyclo-tron system, (RFPG, Vacuum system, Cooling system, GCU and MASTER) before testing the EPO buttons. An abrupt power interrupt may cause severe damage to the Cyclotron subsystems.

1. Press the Emergency Power Off (EPO) button.

2. Use a meter to measure the voltage between L1 and L2 on the EPO circuit breaker.

• The meter should equal 0 volts.

3. Use a meter to measure the voltage between L2 and L3 on the EPO circuit breaker.

• The meter should equal 0 volts.

4. The customer is responsible for the Mains Distribution EPO Arrangement, but some guidance is given in MINItrace Drawing CAC 209-56001 (See Direction 2233001-100 MINItrace Service Manual Drawings and Parts Lists.)

Page 174: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

174 Chapter 6 —System Phase and Power Checks

6-8 Start up Conditions Checklist All items in this section must be completed and checked YES before the team arrives to start up the system.

Check if Yes

Have all power connections been made?

Are voltages correct?

Has the correct 50/60Hz frequency been selected?

Have the compressed air connections been made?

Does the air quality meet specifications?

Does the compressed air pressure meet specifications?

Have the primary cooling water connections been made?

Does the cooling capacity meet specifications?

Does the system have the correct regulators?

Have the He and H2 gas connections been made?

Does the gas quality meet specifications?

Have the correct gas pressure regulators been installed?

Are the gas cylinders on site and correctly connected to the gas panel?

Does the system have the N13 target option? If Yes:

Have the CH4 gas connections been made?

Does the gas quality meet specifications?

Has the correct gas pressure regulator been installed?

Is the gas cylinder on site and connected to the gas panel?

Do the temperature and humidity readings fall within specified limits?

Is the air exhaust system installed and working to specification?

Is the Master computer connected (via the serial net) to the Accelerator?

Is the Service computer included with the system?

If Yes: Is the Service PC connected to the system?

If No: Is the floppy with the service software on site?

Has the service software been loaded on the designated PC?

Page 175: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 6 —System Phase and Power Checks 175

Are the delivery lines connected to the Targets?

Is the hot lab ready to receive product?

Are the Safety Facilities ready for the System Start-up?

Are the delivery lines adequately shielded?

Is the hot cell installation complete?

Is the external safety system ready?

Has permission to run the beam been granted?

Page 176: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

176 Chapter 6 —System Phase and Power Checks

Notes and Comments:

Page 177: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 177

CHAPTER 7 — START-UP AND CALIBRATION SEQUENCE

This chapter contains the MINItrace subsystem start-up, calibration and functional test procedures. Upon completion of the physical installation, follow this sequence to start up and calibrate the MINItrace system.

DANGER IF YOU HAVE NOT RECEIVED TRAINING IN RADIATION SAFETY AND MINITRACE SYSTEM SERVICE, DO NOT PROCEED! THIS CHAPTER ASSUMES YOU HAVE RECEIVED PROPER TRAINING, AND ARE AWARE OF THE DANGERS INHERENT IN THE SERVICE, CALIBRATION AND OPERATION OF RADIOCHEMISTRY PRO-DUCTION SYSTEMS.

Note: At the end of each work day, display one of the MSS system pages, (for example, the Vacuum System or Magnet System page) and select the SYSTEM OFF button to shut down the system in an orderly manner.

7-1 Start-up Sequence When you complete the corresponding subsystem start-up section.

1. Control System: Starts on page 178

2. Secondary Cooling Water System: Starts on page 181

3. Vacuum Chamber Checks: Starts on page 195

4. Vacuum System: Starts on page 204

5. Magnet System: Starts on page 212

6. RF System: Starts on page 216

7. Helium Cooling System, LTF System and Target Checks: Starts on page 225

8. Beam Tuning: Starts on page 232

9. Target System: Starts on page 235

10. Functional Test: Starts on page 244

11. FDG Micro Lab: Starts on page 254

Page 178: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

178 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

7-2 Control SystemUse this section to check the system configuration against the actual system, and load the operating software into the GCU. Refer to the MINItrace Service Manual (Direction 2233000) and Master System manual (Direction 2232999) for more detailed information.

1. Locate the plastic folder of system staging information that shipped with the sys-tem.

• This folder also holds the floppy diskette of configuration values, and was probably packed with the rest of the system software.

2. Switch on the MASTER.

• If necessary, consult the OEM documentation for power switch locations.

3. When the MASTER has booted up, switch on power to the GCU.

• The GCU automatically accesses the MASTER and downloads the necessary software when you turn on power.

4. Locate and check the MASTER and GCU transceiver boxes.

• As you turn on the corresponding component, the PWR and SQE LEDs, if present on its transceiver, should light. Not all transceiver boxes have PWR and SQE LEDs.

• The components cannot communicate until the LEDs on all the transceivers light.

Note: Do NOT login at this time!

5. Press RESET on the GCU to reload the software.

• Check the transceivers again, and make sure the RCV/XMIT LEDs light or flash.

• After 2 to 3 minutes, the software is loaded to the CPU on the GCU.

• The LEDs on the top of the GCU start to light.

6. Connect your Service PC (MSS) to the MSS connector on the CSC and use the follow-ing procedure to check the communication with the CPU.

a. Turn on the Service PC (MSS).

b. After Windows starts, click on the MSS icon.

c. The MSS screen updates to display the MSS and GCU software versions.

7. Record the software versions on the start-up certificate, located in Appendix H, Table H-8 .

8. Check all the configuration values stored in the GEM_CONF.DAT file on the configu-ration floppy, sent with the system.

Note: Remember to save any changes you make to the system operating parameters (configuration values) to floppy. The service manual contains the instructions to back-up configuration data.

Page 179: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 179

9. Compare the system Target configuration information with the installed options.

• Make sure the actual installed Target Types, Target Positions and Tracers Used match the configuration information.

10. If necessary, Log off the MSS (laptop) at this time.

11. Login to the MASTER as MANAGER and enter the default password:

• Login: manager Password: manag000

12. Open a Unix terminal window and check the current system configuration:

• Type: tracer-config

• Check the current configuration, and if necessary, configure your system to reflect the actual installed Target Types, Target Positions and Tracers Used.

• Close the tracer-config window.

13. Open a Unix terminal window and check the current parameter configuration:

• Type: param-config

• Set the Pressure Units, Radiation Units and Flow Units to the customer’s pref-erences

• Add the list of Operators provided by the customer to the system.

• Close the param-config window.

14. Open a Unix terminal window and check the report handling parameters:

• Type: handle-reports

• Type/enter the MASTER, MSS and GCS software versions into the terminal win-dow.

• Type/enter the Customers’s address, telephone number(s), fax number, e-mail address and contact person’s name into the corresponding data fields.

• Type/enter the local GE rep’s name, office address, telephone number(s), fax number and e-mail address into the corresponding data fields.

• Close the handle-reports window.

15. Log out from the manager program.

a. Login as root:

* Login: root

* Password: gemsrot

b. Open a Unix terminal window, and type/enter: /usr/sbin/shutdown -i5 -y -g0

c. When the screen prompts you to switch off power, you can safely turn off the workstation.

Page 180: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

180 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

16. If construction work is still going on, unplug the workstation and cover it, the key-board and printer with a dropcloth or a sheet of plastic to keep out the dust. (Or turn the workstation boxes into covers.)

Control system Start-up successfully completed.

Page 181: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 181

7-3 Water Cooling SystemFollow this procedure to bleed all the air from the water lines, and check for leaky con-nections. Keep a bucket and mop and/or sponge nearby! Chapter 8 of the MINItrace Service Manual (Dir# 2233000) contains more detailed information about the Secondary Water Cooling System.

Note: You may fill and bleed the lines as soon as you finish making all the cooling water connections, before applying power to the system. If the compressed air is not yet available, you may be able to fill the and bleed the lines just using the incoming water pressure. When you bleed the target system, things will change, so it’s your option to wait until the targets are in place, then fill and bleed all eight circuits in one session.

7-3-1 Fill the Secondary Water Cooling System with Water

Note: The system specifications call for the installation of two bleeder valves at the high-est point in the chiller lines. The valves should be auto bleeders. Check with the contractor for the actual location(s) and types of valves used on at the facility. If you experience problems with the incoming water, you may have to check these valves.

Repeat the following procedure on each cooling water circuit. Do NOT fill the Target cooling circuit until the Targets have been installed. Start with the RFPG circuit and work your way from left to right, skipping the target circuit , if necessary.

1. Check and tighten ALL the hose connections before you fill the circuit with water.

• Tighten ALL the hose connections on the pressure side of the manifold. (upper tier)

2. Refer to Illustration 7-1. Check the view port on each flow meter in the lower tier (return side) to make sure you have a clear view of the interior. Sometimes the inner sleeve shifts during shipment. If this happens:

a. Loosen the four hex cap set screws at the top of the meter and remove the cap.

b. Insert your finger into the meter and turn the inner sleeve until you can see the indicator cone, the black rod and the back of the meter.

c. Replace the cap and tighten the set screws.

Page 182: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

182 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

ILLUSTRATION 7-1GOOD AND BAD FLOW METER INTERIORS

Black plastic rod and

Good Bad

during shipment,obscuring interior

indicator (cone)should be visible

Page 183: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 183

ILLUSTRATION 7-2CSC VALVE LOCATIONS

V71 Closed

PR3 Open

PR2 Open

V53 Closed

C1 all air valves Closed

V80 Closed

V50 Closed

V51 Open

V52 Closed

V30 Closed

V70 Closed

V2 Open

V52 Closed

Bleeder for water pump

Page 184: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

184 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

3. Turn all the pressure and return valves fully counterclockwise to close them. (OFF)

4. Refer to Illustration 7-2. Locate and set all the valves to the condition listed in Table 7-1 .

TABLE 7-1INITIAL VALVE CONDITIONS

5. Remove the hose from the return side of the valve. (Start with RFPG.)

Note: Refer to the illustrations in this procedure for general component locations. Drawing CAC 212-31001-04-1 shows the entire Cooling System Assembly and all the labels (Direction 2233001).

6. Hold a bucket against valve 71 to catch the spray.

7. Refer to Illustration 7-3. Open V71 (bleeder valve).

a. As the air (and water mist) bleeds out, the lines fill with water.

b. Fill the system until BP1 reads about 0.75 bar.

8. Open the corresponding valve on the pressure side. (RFPG valve the first time)

Valve Condition

V53 (Compressed air to expansion vessel) Closed

V71 (Bleeder) Closed

V80 (Drain) Closed

V51 Open

V50 (Water Inlet) Closed

V52 (to Filter) Open

V2 Open

V3 Open

V52 (Drain) Closed

V30 (Air Inlet) Closed

V70 (Bleeder) Closed

PR2 Open

PR3 Open

C1 All air valves closed

Page 185: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 185

ILLUSTRATION 7-3TOP PORTION OF THE COOLING SYSTEM ASSEMBLY

9. Continue to monitor BP1 (don’t peg the needle) and adjust V50 until the BP1 needle steadies somewhere between 0.5 and 0.75bar.

ILLUSTRATION 7-4ADJUST V50

10. As soon as all water and no air comes out of the return side hose, close the valve on the pressure side of that circuit .

V71 (bleeder valve)BP1

Watch Tube

V53

C1 tank

Pressure valves

V80

V50

V30

C1 block Return valves

Flow meters

Page 186: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

186 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

11. Repeat the process on the next circuit, working from left to right.

• REMEMBER to skip the target circuit unless the targets are in place.

Note: The targets have one supply line and two return lines. The upper valve labeled, Tar-get, controls the supply to ALL the targets.

RFPG cooling circuit filled. (Leave the cover off the TAU until you pressurize the SWCU cir-cuits. See Illustration 7-23 on page 217.)

MAGNET cooling circuit filled.

RF1 cooling circuit filled.

RF2 cooling circuit filled.

TARGET cooling circuits filled.

VACUUM cooling circuit filled.

I-S cooling circuit filled.

7-3-2 Start up the Secondary Water Cooling System

Follow the instructions in this section to start pumping water through the secondary water cooling system.

Note: The MINItrace is staged with a 50Hz water pump. If the system goes to a facility with 60Hz power frequency, the pump is changed during the disassembly and packing process. IF your site has 60Hz power, it is very important to make sure the 60Hz pump is present and rotating in the proper direction when you apply power.

1. Check that the primary cooling water temperature falls between 10 and 13oC.

• If the water temperature falls at the low end of the range, check the hoses for condensation and make sure the pipes to the shunt are well insulated.

• If the water temperature falls at the high end of the range, you may have to increase the water flow through the system to provide adequate cooling.

2. Check the secondary cooling water temperature on the panel beneath the VCU.

• The water temperature should remain steady at 20oC +/- 2 degrees.

3. Refer to Illustration 7-5. Locate the water pump beneath the return valves in the CSC.

• Make sure the round frequency sticker on the side cover of the pump matches the on-site power frequency.

• If a mismatch exists, DO NOT apply power until you replace the cooling pump.

Page 187: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 187

ILLUSTRATION 7-5SECONDARY COOLING WATER PUMP

CAUTION Do NOT start the water pump until you bleed out any air that may be inside. Failure to bleed the pump before starting it could damage the pump vanes.

4. Bleed the water pump before you start it:

a. If necessary, adjust V50 until the water pressure at BP1 falls between 0.5 and 0.75bar.

b. Refer to Illustration 7-2. Place a bucket against the water pump bleeder, to catch any water.

c. Refer to Illustration 7-2. Open the bleeder on the water pump, and let the pres-sure in the system drive out the air.

d. Close the bleeder valve when only water escapes.

5. Check the pump phasing.

a. Locate the yellow rotational direction sticker on top of the pump.

b. Locate the CP circuit breaker (CB2) and contactor (CON2) in the narrow CSC.

c. Turn on CB2.

d. Briefly turn on and off the VCU Cooling ON button on the control panel as you check the direction of the fan blades. Look through the ventilation-grating on the top of the water pump. Use a flashlight for a better view.

e. If the direction is wrong; turn off the pump and CB2. Locate the source of the phase swap.

F10Rotation Direction Indicator

Frequency label location

Page 188: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

188 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

6. If the phasing is correct, start the water pump and bleed it

a. Press the VCU Cooling ON button, on the control panel, to start the pump.

b. Run the pump for three seconds.

c. Refer to Illustration 7-2. Stop the pump, open the bleeder, and bleed out the air.

d. Run the pump for six seconds.

e. Refer to Illustration 7-2. Stop the pump, open the bleeder, and bleed out the air.

f. Run the pump for 12 seconds.

g. Refer to Illustration 7-2. Stop the pump, open the bleeder, and bleed out the air.

h. Continue to start the pump for 12 seconds, stop it, and open the bleeder, until NO air escapes.

i. When only water escapes from the bleeder, turn on the pump for two minutes, then stop the pump and bleed it .

j. When NO air escapes after running for two minutes, you have successfully evacuated all the air from the cooling system.

7. After you finish bleeding the air from the system, leave the pump on, and start to open the cooling circuits.

a. Check the water wheel, F10, above the pump for motion. Adjust V51 until you can see the blades rotate. (If the wheel looks like a blur, the flow is too fast.)

b. Check the internal CSC components and hoses for water leaks under pressure.

8. Open one set of pressure and return valves and check the corresponding hose con-nections for leaks.

• Continue to open each (completed) circuit in turn, while monitoring all active circuits.

• Periodically check the hose connections on the active circuits every day, for leaks.

9. When you open a cooling circuit, turn the return (lower) valve fully clockwise.

10. Refer to Table 7-2 . Adjust the water flow meters in the individual circuits with the corresponding pressure valves.

• If the water flow falls below an acceptable level, the MSS will display an alarm.

Page 189: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 189

TABLE 7-2FLOW METER SETTINGS

11. During normal system operation, the watch tube should remain about half filled and BP1 should read about 0.5bar. Refer to Illustration 7-3, Illustration 7-4, and Illustration 7-6.

a. Adjust BP1 to 0.5mbar by changing the pressure in the C1 tank.

1. Locate the EXP (expansion) valve on the C1 block.

2. If the BP1 pressure is too high: Push the blue sleeve against the C1 block to release the pressure on the hose. Open V53 to release pressure in the C1 tank until BP1 drops to 0.5mbar.

3. If the BP1 pressure is too low: Pull the blue sleeve away from the C1 block to pressurize the hose. Open V53 to increase pressure in the C1 tank.

b. Adjust the watch tube level with V50 and V80.

1. If the watch tube level is too low: Adjust V50 until the water rises about half-way up the watch tube.

2. If the watch tube level is too high: Locate the open end of the hose attached to V80 and place it in a bucket. Adjust V80 to drain the excess water from the watch tube.

12. Continue to monitor the secondary cooling water temperature on the panel

beneath the VCU. It should remain steady at 20oC +/- 2 degrees, with no condensa-tion on the lines.

Tip: Refer to Illustration 7-6. If you need compressed air, attach the hose to one of the unused valves on the back of the C1 block. Slide the blue sleeve away from the C1 block to turn on the compressed air.

Pressure Valve Label Return Valve/Meter Label Minimum (l/min) Average (l/min)

RFPG RFPG - >15

MAGNET MAGNET 4 5-6

RF1 RF1 8 10-12

RF2 RF2 8 10-12

TARGET TARGET S 2 3

TARGET TARGET D 2 3

PSMC PSMC - 4-8

VACUUM VACUUM 3 4

I - S I - S 0.7 1

Page 190: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

190 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

ILLUSTRATION 7-6COMPRESSED AIR LINE

7-3-3 Check the Cooling Water Temperature Sensor

The MINItrace system ships with the cooling water temperature sensor pre-pro-grammed to trigger an alarm when the water temperature rises above 25 degrees cen-tigrade. Follow the procedure in this section to make sure the programming survived shipment. IF the temperature sensor lost its presets, follow the procedure in Section 7-3-3-1 to reprogram it .

1. Refer to Illustration 7-7. Press and hold the SEL button about 2 seconds, until the temperature display starts to flash.

2. Press the arrow buttons to change the display value to 25.

3. Press the SEL button to accept the displayed value.

• The alarm level is now set to 25oC

C1 Block

C1 Tank

Check C1 for condensationduring the first few daysof operation.

Page 191: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 191

ILLUSTRATION 7-7WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR

4. IF you cannot set the alarm level, the sensor has lost its programming. Proceed to Section 7-3-3-1, to program the cooling water temperature sensor.

7-3-3-1 Program the Cooling Water Temperature Sensor

IF the water temperature sensor lost its presets, follow the procedure in this section to program the sensor.

Notice You may leave the setup program at any time, without saving the new values, by pressing and holding any button for 60 seconds.

1. Refer to Illustration 7-7. Press and hold both the PRG MUTE and SEL buttons for at least 5 seconds, to display the configuration menu.

2. Press the UP arrow to display the value, 22.

3. Press SEL.

• The display changes to = /C

4. Press the UP arrow until the display changes to rd.

5. Press the SEL button to display the rd value.

6. Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to change the display to 0.1.

7. Press the SEL button to confirm the new value.

8. Press the DOWN arrow button until the display changes to A0.

9. Press the SEL button to display the A0 value

10. Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to change the display to 0.1.

UP and Down arrowsSEL button

PRG/Mute button

Page 192: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

192 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

11. Press the SEL button to confirm the new value.

12. Press the DOWN arrow button until the display changes to AL.

13. Press the SEL button to display the AL value.

14. Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to change the display to 00.

15. Press the SEL button to confirm the new value.

16. Press the DOWN arrow button until the display changes to AH.

17. Press the SEL button to display the AH value.

18. Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to change the display to 05.

19. Press the SEL button to confirm the new value.

20. Press the DOWN arrow button until the display changes to Ad.

21. Press the SEL button to display the Ad value.

22. Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to change the display to 00.

23. Press the SEL button to confirm the new value.

24. Press the DOWN arrow button until the display changes to H1.

25. Press the SEL button to display the H1 value.

26. Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to change the display to 01.

27. Press the SEL button to confirm the new value.

28. Press the DOWN arrow button until the display changes to H2.

29. Press the SEL button to display the H2 value.

30. Use the UP/DOWN arrow buttons to change the display to 03.

31. Press the SEL button to confirm the new value.

32. Press the PRG button to confirm all the program values.

33. Return to Section 7-3-3, to set the water temperature sensor alarm value.

Page 193: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 193

7-3-4 Check the Shunt Valve Temperature Control Adjustment

This section contains the instructions to set and test the shunt valve temperature con-trol. Illustration 7-8 shows the control unit with labels that correspond to steps in this procedure.

1. Ramp up the magnet to put a heat load on the system, to check the three-way valve operation. If necessary, refer to 7-6 for detailed instructions.

• Start the magnet at a low value of between 30 to 50 amps, to create a small heat load of 5 to 10kW.

ILLUSTRATION 7-8TIDUR SHUNT VALVE TEMPERATURE CONTROL

2. Refer to Illustration 7-8. Locate the TIDUR shunt valve, in the Cyclotron Support Cabinet.

3. If necessary, disable the timer by setting the TIDUR switch to the 0 position.

4. Turn the right-most knob (labeled with ↓) to 0.

5. Refer to Illustration 7-7. Record the value currently displayed on the water temper-ature sensor: __________.

6. Subtract 20 from the value recorded in Step 5: ___________.

7. Set the middle knob (with the sun icon) to the value you recorded in Step 6.

8. Remove the black cover from the hole next to the left-most knob (with the moon icon).

Step 3

Step 4Steps 7 and 10Steps 8, 9 and 12Step 9Step 11

Page 194: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

194 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

9. Insert a screwdriver into the hole, and adjust the potentiometer until the center LED (labeled 0) turns green.

10. Set the middle knob (with the sun icon) back to the 0 position.

11. Adjust the white potentiometer (upper left side of the device) to provide a 10 to 20 second pause between shunt motor operations.

• Make sure the shunt motor does NOT oscillate.

12. Replace the black cover over the potentiometer access hole.

Page 195: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 195

7-4 Vacuum Chamber Checks

CAUTION Remove any tools and test equipment from the interior, and close the door to the vacuum chamber any time you leave the system for more than 15 min-utes. Keep the MINItrace Cyclotron room as clean as possible, to minimize conditioning time, and prevent the possible contamination of the vacuum chamber.

Clean the cyclotron room, then open the vacuum chamber and follow the instructions in this section to:

• Inspect the vacuum chamber and remove any packing material.

• Install the shield wedges that were removed during system disassembly to accom-modate the magnet transport shield.

• Check the calibration and function of the extraction system.

• Inspect the foils for damage.

• Check the function of the flip-in probe.

• Inspect the center region and Ion Source.

Note: The MINItrace Service Manual (Dir# 2233000) contains more detailed Vacuum, Diagnostic and Extraction System information.

7-4-1 Clean the Cyclotron Room and Accelerator Surfaces

Prepare to open the vacuum chamber:

• Remove any debris from the Cyclotron vault.

• Vacuum any dust or dirt from the floor, cable raceways and/or shields.

• Arrange to have the floor damp mopped to remove any traces of dust or dirt.

• Clean the exterior surfaces of the magnet and all accessible shield surfaces.

7-4-2 Inspect the Vacuum Chamber

CAUTION Always wear clean cotton or non-powdered examination gloves when work-ing in the vacuum chamber. Take care NOT to scratch the interior surfaces of the chamber.

Remove any tools and test equipment from the interior, and close the door to the vacuum chamber any time you leave the system for more than 15 min-utes. Keep the MINItrace Cyclotron room as clean as possible, to minimize conditioning time, and prevent the possible contamination of the vacuum chamber.

Page 196: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

196 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

1. The system ships with a ratcheting socket wrench to open the vacuum chamber door.

• Locate the wrench and open the vacuum chamber door.

2. Inspect the interior for obvious damage.

3. Remove any packing materials and brush out any large particles from the interior.

4. Make sure a blind flange covers every unused or unoccupied port. (Illustration 7-9)

5. Close the vacuum chamber, or proceed to the next subsection.

ILLUSTRATION 7-9BLIND FLANGES

7-4-3 Install the last four Shield Wedges

The 13 shield wedges were removed during system disassembly, and the magnet trans-port shield was attached to the cyclotron by the holes tapped into the assembly to hold the wedges in place. You have to open the vacuum chamber door to attach the remain-ing four wedges.

CAUTION Always wear clean cotton or non-powdered examination gloves when work-ing in the vacuum chamber. Take care NOT to scratch the interior chamber surfaces.

Remove any tools and test equipment from the interior, and close the door to the vacuum chamber any time you leave the system for more than 15 min-utes. Keep the MINItrace Cyclotron room as clean as possible, to minimize

Page 197: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 197

conditioning time, and prevent the possible contamination of the vacuum chamber.

1. Refer to Illustration 5-1: Inner shield Assembly on page 128.

• The shield wedges should be labeled with the parts list call-out number.

2. Locate the last four shield wedges that were packed with the plastic shields in Crate 11.

3. Open the vacuum chamber door.

4. Attach the following four shield wedges to the vacuum chamber door with the washer and the M12 bolt that measures 202mm from end-to-end (NOT thread length):

• Shield Wedge 15 (rests against the door)

• Shield Wedge 9

• Shield Wedge 14

• Shield Wedge 13

7-4-4 Check the Extraction System

Follow the instructions in this section to inspect and test the extraction system opera-tion.

CAUTION Always wear clean cotton or non-powdered examination gloves when work-ing in the vacuum chamber. Take care NOT to scratch the interior chamber surfaces.

Remove any tools and test equipment from the interior, and close the door to the vacuum chamber any time you leave the system for more than 15 min-utes. Keep the MINItrace Cyclotron room as clean as possible, to minimize conditioning time, and prevent the possible contamination of the vacuum chamber.

1. Open the vacuum chamber.

2. Refer to Illustration 7-11. Compare your system to the illustration, to determine whether the MINItrace has a single extraction system, with one motor, or a dual extraction system with two extraction motors and a balance motor.

CAUTION The foils are fragile!

3. Check the foils. If you see any damage, wait until you complete the extraction and diagnostic checks to replace it/them. (Spares were shipped with the system.)

4. Check the mechanical assembly for loose or damaged parts.

5. Make sure the wires are centered over the pulleys, and appear taut.

Page 198: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

198 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

6. Connect the Service PC (MSS) to the MSS port on the CSC panel and login as MSS.

• Move the MSS close to the vacuum chamber, so you can watch the extraction system move when you give the commands.

• During the following tests, listen and watch for signs of binding or damage.

Notice NEVER touch the interior of the vacuum chamber with your bare hands. The oil residue from your skin will outgas and cause sparking when you apply RF.

7-4-5 Calibrate the Extraction Motor.

1. Check that the extraction system operates smoothly.

2. Use a current source (resistance tester or multimeter set to measure Ω) to induce a current in the flip-in probe, extraction foils, collimators and target, and compare the actual values to the values on the MSS DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM page.

a. Attach the ground lead to some part of the vacuum chamber.

b. Read the resistance on the meter, and the current on the MSS DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM page, while you touch the (+) probe to the each of the following com-ponents:

> Flip-in probe: 10µΑ/20kΩ

> Collimators: 10µΑ/20kΩ

> Targets: 10µΑ/20kΩ

> Extraction foil holders: 5µΑ (1/2 the current)/20kΩ

CAUTION If you notice any jerky motion, or slack in the cables when you change foil holder positions, immediately stop and consult the Service Mainte-nance Manual (2233000).

ILLUSTRATION 7-10Open the MSS DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM page, and set the Foil Holder position 1 to the halfway point (50%).

a. Watch for smooth operation in the counterclockwise direction.

b. Move the Foil Holder position 1 to 80%.

c. IF the foil holder appears to move smoothly, continue to change the position by 5% steps until it reaches the 100% position and flips to the second foil.

d. Make sure the holder doesn’t drive into the physical limit at the 100% position, and that the foil holder turns over completely. (Check the position with your finger.)

Page 199: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 199

ILLUSTRATION 7-11SINGLE AND DUAL EXTRACTION SYSTEMS

Dual Extraction System

Single Extraction System

Page 200: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

200 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

3. Refer to Illustration 7-11. IF the MINItrace has the Dual Extraction option:

a. Repeat Illustration 7-10 for Foil Holder position 2. (Foil holder 2 only has one foil.)

b. Set the Balance to 80%.

c. Make sure the assembly drives toward the center of the chamber.

d. Set the Balance to 50% to drive the assembly away from the center.

e. Set the Balance to 100% and watch the assembly move toward the center.

f. Make sure the wires remain under tension (no slack) during the entire process, and that the foil holder doesn’t drive into the physical limit. (After it reaches the 100% position and flips to the second foil, the foil holder is about 1mm away from the physical limit.)

4. Display the MSS MAIN MENU.

5. Click the MOTOR CALIBRATION icon to display the MOTOR CALIBRATION page.

6. Click on FOIL #1 to select Foil Holder position 1.

7. Click on CALIBRATE to drive the Foil Holder to the 100% position.

• Check for smooth operation of the foil system as it moves to the 100% posi-tion.

• Watch the current value on the MSS change as the assembly moves. Make sure it ramps up smoothly.

8. IF the MINItrace has the Dual Extraction option:

a. Click on FOIL #2 to select Foil Holder position 2.

b. Click on CALIBRATE to drive the Foil Holder to the 100% position.

c. Check for smooth operation of the foil system as it moves to the 100% posi-tion.

d. Watch the current value on the MSS change as the assembly moves. Make sure it ramps up smoothly.

9. IF the MINItrace has the Dual Extraction option:

a. Click on BALANCE.

b. Click on CALIBRATE.

c. Check for smooth operation of the foil system.

d. Watch the current value on the MSS change as the assembly moves. Make sure it ramps up smoothly.

Page 201: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 201

10. You may repeat the calibration process as many times as you like. When finished:

a. Return to the MSS DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM page.

b. Set the Foil Holder position 1 to 20%.

c. Manually flip the foil holder back to the first position.

d. Dual extraction systems: Set the Balance to 5.0.

e. Dual extraction systems: Set the Foil Holder position 2 to 50%.

Extraction System Checks successfully completed.

7-4-6 Check the Diagnostic System

Follow the procedure in this section to check the motion of the flip-in probe and the diameter of the collimator ports

CAUTION Always wear clean cotton or non-powdered examination gloves when work-ing in the vacuum chamber. Take care NOT to scratch the interior surfaces of the chamber.

Remove any tools and test equipment from the interior, and close the door to the vacuum chamber any time you leave the system for more than 15 min-utes. Keep the MINItrace Cyclotron room as clean as possible, to minimize conditioning time, and prevent the possible contamination of the vacuum chamber.

7-4-6-1 Check the Flip-In Probe Motion

Measure the coil voltage while activating the Flip-in probe.

1. Open the vacuum chamber.

2. Connect the Service PC (MSS) to the MSS port on the CSC panel and login as MSS.

• Move the MSS close to the vacuum chamber.

3. Check the mechanical motion of the Flip-in probe:

• Move the Flip-in probe coil back and forth with your (gloved) finger.

• Make sure the coil moves freely, without binding; move it all the way in and release.

• Make sure the coil moves back out, without sticking.

4. Display the BEAM CONTROL page on the MSS.

5. Click on PROBE IN.

• The probe will not move with the vacuum chamber door open.

Page 202: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

202 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

6. Refer to Illustration 7-12. Measure the coil voltage at the coil connectors.

• The voltage should read 12 to 15VDC.

ILLUSTRATION 7-12MEASURE THE FLIP-IN PROBE VOLTAGE

7-4-7 Inspect the Center Region and Ion Source.

CAUTION Always wear clean cotton or non-powdered examination gloves when work-ing in the vacuum chamber. Take care NOT to scratch the interior surfaces of the chamber.

Remove any tools and test equipment from the interior, and close the door to the vacuum chamber any time you leave the system for more than 15 min-utes. Keep the MINItrace Cyclotron room as clean as possible, to minimize conditioning time, and prevent the possible contamination of the vacuum chamber.

1. Open the vacuum chamber.

2. Inspect the Ion Source and Dee assemblies for signs of physical damage.

• Do not check the Ion Source and Dee adjustments at this time.

3. Check the physical diameter of the collimator openings with calipers.

• Each collimator port diameter should equal 6mm +/-1mm.

4. Inspect the foils for damage.

5. If you notice any damage, replace the foil(s) at this time.

• Follow the procedure in Direction 2233000 to replace a damaged foil.

Coil connections

Page 203: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 203

CAUTION Carefully inspect the interior of vacuum chamber before you close the door. REMEMBER to remove all your tools and test equipment from the interior. Wipe all the chamber surfaces that make contact with the o-ring with a lint-free cloth and alcohol. Do NOT clean the O-ring with alcohol! Remove any dust from the surfaces and inspect for marks. Apply a light coat of Apiezon-M vacuum grease to the o-ring. This is the last time the vacuum chamber will be open before you bring up the vacuum and apply RF.

6. Close the vacuum chamber, and fasten the door.

• REMOVE any tools and test equipment from the interior.

• Inspect the interior surfaces and remove any dust or marks with a lint-free cloth, moistened with alcohol. (From the installation gang box)

• Wipe all chamber surfaces that make contact with the gasket seal (O-ring), with a lint-free cloth, moistened with alcohol. Do NOT wipe the O-ring with alcohol!

• Apply a light coat of Apiezon-M vacuum grease to the o-ring. (The tube of vacuum grease is in the installation gang box.)

Diagnostic system checks successfully completed.

Page 204: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

204 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

7-5 Vacuum SystemFollow the instructions in this section to bring up vacuum in the cyclotron. Chapter 9 of the MINItrace Service Manual (Direction 2233000) contains more detailed information.

1. Refer to Illustration 7-13. Check the oil level in the rotary pump site glass, it should fall between the two markings.

• If the site glass appears low, top off the with BALZERS P3 oil.

Note: The following steps require 2 people, one person at the rotary pump and one per-son to turn the rotary pump on and off from the VCU Cooling panel.

ILLUSTRATION 7-13ROTARY PUMP COMPARTMENT

2. Check the rotary pump rotation direction. Refer to Illustration 7-13.

a. Unfasten the wing nut and disconnect the flexible metal hose from the rotary pump inlet.

b. Remove the O-ring from the coupling.

Rotary pump site glass

Operating fluid filler and drain screw

Rotary pump inlet

Page 205: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 205

Notice If the pump rotates in the wrong direction, oil will come out of the rotary pump inlet, so only turn on the pump for brief periods of time.

c. Turn on RP CB1 in the narrow CSC.

d. Press the MANUAL button on the VCU Vacuum System.

e. Place a plastic lid or similar object against the rotary pump inlet, while the other person presses the RP button on the VCU to start the rotary pump.

f. You should feel a definite suction when the rotational direction is correct.

g. If you feel air blowing out, the phasing is incorrect. If this is the case, check the phase of the incoming power and correct the problem at its source. Then, repeat Step 2 to make sure the pump rotates in the correct direction.

3. Wipe any dust or oil residue from the open ends of the flexible metal hose and rotary pump inlet.

4. Apply a light coat of vacuum grease to the O-ring, and reconnect the rotary pump inlet hose to the diffusion pump.

• The tube of vacuum grease is in the installation gang box.

5. Check that the cooling water hoses are correctly and securely connected to the dif-fusion pump. Cold water enters the top of the diffusion pump, and the heated water exits from the bottom of the pump.

6. Open the VACUUM PUMP pressure and return valves in the SWCU in the CSC.

7. Refer to Illustration 7-14. Check the 6mm blue compressed air line connections to the Backing Valve, Roughing Valve and High Vacuum Valve.

Note: The customer usually supplies the compressed air, either by a dedicated unit, or as a feed from the in-house system. If necessary, contact the facility maintenance/engineer to turn on the compressed air supply.

Notice IF the compressed air pressure falls below the limit set on the compressed air interlock on the C1 block (Illustration 7-15) the interlock trips and you cannot operate the system in automatic mode, but it will work in manual mode. If you encounter this problem, call for support.

Page 206: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

206 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

ILLUSTRATION 7-14CHECK DIFFUSION PUMP CONNECTIONS

8. Refer to Illustration 7-15. Switch on the compressed air supply.

a. Locate the C1 block in the CSC, next to the SWCU.

b. Slide the blue sleeve labeled, VAC. S., away from the block to turn on the air.

c. Slide the blue sleeve labeled, HVV, away from the block to turn on the air.

High Vacuum Valve Switch

Backing Valve (BV)

Roughing Valve (RV)

Rotary Pump

Penning Gauge

DP Temp Switch

Pirani 2

Pirani 1

High Vacuum Valve (HVV)

(HVV SW)

to Diffusion Pump baffle

Page 207: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 207

ILLUSTRATION 7-15C1 COMPRESSED AIR BLOCK

9. Make sure the cooling system is running.

• If necessary, press the VCU Cooling panel ON button to start the system.

10. The MINItrace VCU and TPG 300 panels are located in the narrow Cyclotron Support Cabinet, above the door pendant control plug.

• Press the VCU MANUAL button.

Note: The following steps require two people, one to press the buttons and watch the status LEDs on the VCU panel change from red to green (to red), and one next to the diffusion pump to watch and listen for valve activity. Close the vacuum cham-ber door to satisfy the roughing valve interlock, but leave the shield doors open.

ILLUSTRATION 7-16OLD AND NEW VALVE BODY STYLES

VAC. S.

HVV

Compressed air interlockIf this trips, the Vacuumsystem will NOT work inautomatic mode.

Indicator turns green

Page 208: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

208 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

11. Test the function of the valves from the VCU panel:

a. Press the BV button to enable the Backing Valve and turn the BV LED to green.

* The indicator turns green or the piston extends from the back of the Backing Valve.

b. Press the BV button a second time to disable the Backing Valve and turn the corresponding LED on the VCU from green to red.

c. Press the RV button to enable the Roughing Valve and turn the RV LED to green.

* The indicator turns green or the piston extends from the back of the Rough-ing Valve.

d. Press the RV button a second time to disable the Roughing Valve and turn the corresponding LED on the VCU from green to red.

WARNING THE HVV VALVE OPENS SLOWLY AND CLOSES QUICKLY. KEEP YOUR FINGERS AWAY FROM THE HVV VALVE AREA DURING THIS OPERATION.

e. Press the HVV button to enable the High Vacuum Valve and turn the HVV LED from red to green.

* The HVV valve starts to move.

f. Press the HVV button a second time to disable the High Vacuum Valve, and turn the corresponding LED from green to red.

g. Press the VV button to enable the Vent Valve and turn the VV LED to green.

h. Press the VV button again to disable the valve and turn the VV LED red.

* The other person should hear the vent disable.

12. Press the MANUAL button to toggle the VCU to automatic mode

13. Adjust the Pirani 1 ATM pressure:

a. Disconnect the Pirani at the cyclotron, nearest the backing valve, and read the A1 sensor the TPG 300 panel, located above the VCU in the CSC.

b. If necessary, press the TPG 300 SENSOR button to display the A1 reading.

c. A1 should read 1.0 x 10+3mbar (atmospheric pressure at sea level).

d. Refer to Illustration 7-17. To adjust the Pirani ATM:

1. Loosen the four screws on the front panel of the TPG 300 and carefully pull the unit out of the rack to access the PI 300 modules.

2. Looking from behind, the left-most TPG 300 board has two sets of trim pots, one set per Pirani. (The top pot in each set is labeled ATM and the bottom pot is labeled High Vac.)

Page 209: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 209

3. Adjust the topmost ATM pot, until the A1 sensor on the TPG 300 panel displays

1.0 x 10+3mbar.

e. Reconnect the Pirani.

ILLUSTRATION 7-17PIRANI ADJUSTMENT POTENTIOMETERS

14. Adjust the Pirani 2 ATM pressure:

a. Press the TPG 300 SENSOR button to display the A2 reading.

b. Disconnect the Pirani attached to the vacuum chamber, and read the A2 dis-play.

c. A2 should read 1.0 x 10+3mbar (atmospheric pressure at sea level).

d. Refer to Illustration 7-17. To adjust the Pirani 2 ATM:

1. If necessary, follow the instructions in the previous step to access the PI 300 module and trim pots.

2. Adjust the ATM pot from the bottom set of pots, until the A2 sensor on the TPG

300 panel displays 1.0 x 10+3mbar.

e. Reconnect the Pirani to the vacuum chamber.

15. Make sure the SWCU pump is running, the VACUUM PUMP pressure and return valves are open and the flow meter adjusted. (Table 7-2 on page 189).

16. Turn ON the DP CB3 circuit breaker.

• Make sure the DIFF.PUMP contactor (CON 3) energizes.

Pirani 1 adjustment pots

Pirani 2 adjustment pots

Page 210: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

210 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

17. Press the STAND BY button to start the roughing down process.

• The RP indicator on the VCU changes from red to green.

• After a few seconds, the BV indicator on the VCU changes from red to green.

18. Read the A1 pressure on the TPG 300 panel.

• Press the SENSOR button until the A1 value appears on the display.

• When the pressure reaches 2.0 x 10-1mbar, the power switches ON to the dif-fusion pump and the DP indicator on the VCU changes from red, to flashing green, and continues to flash while the rotary pump pumps down the diffusion pump.

19. After 30 +/- 5 minutes, the diffusion pump LED on the VCU front panel turns green.

20. If the Diffusion Pump is OK, press the PUMP button to start the vacuum sequence.

• The BV indicator turns red and the RV indicator on the VCU changes from red to green.

• When A2 pressure reaches 7.0 x 10-2, the roughing sequence ends. The HVV opens and the Diffusion pump takes over.

Note: If the DP LED flashes for 40 minutes or longer, the DP temperature switch may be bad.

CAUTION The diffusion pump becomes hot enough to instantly blister the skin.

21. When the A2 pressure reaches 1.0 x 10-3mbar, the penning gauge switches on and the TPG 300 panel display automatically changes to the B1 reading.

• IF the TPG 300 display does not switch from the A2 to the B1 display within 5 minutes, adjust the Pirani 2 High Vac trim pot.

• Refer to Step 13 for instructions to access the PI 300 module. Slowly turn the bottom-most pot (High Vac) until the display changes to the B1 reading. (You will fine tune this adjustment later.)

22. Twenty to thirty minutes later, check the B1 sensor display at the TPG 300 panel.

• The pressure should read 4.0 x 10-5mbar or less* (*standard operating pres-

sure is <6.0 x 10-7mbar, but it takes 2 or 3 days to reach this level.)

23. If you adjusted the Pirani 2 during, Step 21, fine tune the adjustment at this time:

• At the Pirani 2 PI 300 module, slowly turn the bottom (High Vac) pot until the

display reads ur x 10-4mbar (ur = under range).

• Gently tweak the pot back and forth between the 1.0 x 10-4mbar and ur x 10-

4mbar readings until the display just changes to the ur x 10-4mbar reading.

Page 211: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 211

24. Record the following parameters in the start-up certificate. (Appendix H)

• Heating time (START to Diffusion pump OK)

• Pump down time (Diffusion pump OK to vacuum OK)

• Backing pressure (A1)

• Tank pressure (B1)

• Cooling water temperature (panel above the Door Pendant Control plug in CSC)

Vacuum system Start-up successfully completed.

Page 212: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

212 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

7-6 Magnet SystemFollow the procedures in this section to apply current to the magnet and check the mag-net interlocks. Chapter 11 in Direction 2233000 contains more detailed instructions.

1. Verify that all hoses, power, water interlock and signal cables have been installed between the PSMC, CSC and Magnet.

CAUTION Make sure the high current cables are securely fastened, and insulation pro-tects all metal contact surfaces to prevent shorts.

2. Connect the MSS to the port beneath the Door Pendant Control plug in the CSC.

ILLUSTRATION 7-18MSS PORT IN THE CYCLOTRON SUPPORT CABINET

3. Check the MSS MAGNET SYSTEM page for magnet system error messages.

• Reset if necessary. If the error continues, check the interlock chain.

4. Check the vacuum chamber door switch function.

• Press the VENT button on the VCU panel to vent the vacuum chamber.

• Use the Door Pendant Control to open the shield doors.

• Open the door to the vacuum chamber, and check for a response on the MSS MAGNET SYSTEM screen.

• Close the vacuum chamber door.

5. Check the Water Flow interlock function by slowly closing off the pressure valve in the Cyclotron Support Cabinet (CSC).

• Check the water flow status on the MSS MAGNET SYSTEM page for alarms.

• Open the valve until the water flow meter pressure returns to the previous level.

MSS connection on CSC

Page 213: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 213

6. Refer to Illustration 7-19. Check the magnet coil (cyclotron) temperature switch function.

• Unplug the cable to one of the temperature switches on the magnet.

• Check that the interlock alarm displays on the PSMC.

ILLUSTRATION 7-19MAGNET POWER, COOLING AND COIL TEMPERATURE SWITCH CONNECTIONS

7. Refer to Illustration 7-19 and Illustration 7-20. Attach a multimeter (voltage and fre-quency meter) to the magnet high current connections at the cyclotron or PSMC.

Magnet Power connections (to Contact plate in raceway attached to inner shield cavity)

Temperature Switch LocationCooling Hoses

Cooling Hoses

Page 214: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

214 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

ILLUSTRATION 7-20MAGNET POWER CABLE CONNECTIONS TO THE PSMC

8. Switch on the water-cooling system from the VCU panel on the CSC.

9. Use the MSS software to reset all the interlocks.

a. Display the MAGNET SYSTEM page, and verify all the interlocks are green.

b. Click the magnet ON.

c. Click on the UP arrow key to increment the current up to 10A.

10. Refer to Illustration 7-20. Use the DC clamp-on ammeter to read the current, and the voltmeter to read the voltage at the magnet.

• Record the current, the DC voltage and ripple in the start up appendix. (Appendix H)

11. Monitor the MSS screen and VCU panel for heat faults and alarms.

• Continue to check all the cooling lines for water leaks and condensation.

12. Display the MAGNET SYSTEM page and click OFF.

• Verify the magnet ramps down to 1A before the PSMC turns off.

13. Display the MAGNET SYSTEM page and click ON.

a. Type 130 into the Set Current field to set the Magnet to 130A.

b. The current should ramp up to 150A, stay there for one minute, then ramp down to 130A.

Attach DC Clamp-on Ammeter here (Clamp around both + wires)

Page 215: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 215

14. Monitor the MSS screen and VCU panel for heat faults and alarms.

• Continue to check all cooling lines for water leaks and condensation.

15. Check the voltage and current at the magnet.

• Record the current, the DC voltage and ripple in the start up certificate.

16. Type 150 into the MAGNET SYSTEM page Set Current field, to increase the current to 100%.

• The current should ramp up 150A, then stop.

17. Check the voltage and current at the magnet.

• Record the current, the DC voltage and ripple in the start up certificate.

18. Compare the current and voltage values you read at the magnet to the ones dis-played on the Service PC (MSS).

19. Check the water temperature at the cooling water panel, beneath the VCU panel.

• The temperature should not increase more than 4oC. (If it does, something is wrong with the temperature regulation circuit and shunt valve.)

20. Use the MSS MAGNET SYSTEM page software to turn OFF the PSMC.

• Verify the magnet ramps down to 1A before the PSMC turns off.

21. Display the MAGNET SYSTEM page and click ON.

• Type 130 into the Set Magnet Current window, to set the current to 130A.

22. Monitor the following sequence"

• The current ramps up to a maximum of 150A, with a ramp speed of 1A/sec-ond.

• The current remains at 100% for 60 seconds, then ramps down to the set cur-rent.

23. Display the MAGNET SYSTEM page and click OFF.

24. Check that the current ramps down at a rate of 1A/second, to zero, before the PSMC finally switches off.

25. Disconnect the multimeter and DC clamp-on ammeter.

26. Restore all panels and close all covers.

Magnet Start up successfully completed.

Page 216: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

216 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

7-7 RF System

DANGER DISCHARGE CAPACITORS WITH THE GROUNDING HOOK ANY TIME YOU OPEN THE LOWER PART OF THE RFPG.

Follow the procedure in this section to:

• Check the TAU for water leaks.

• Check the TPSU power setting.

• Apply power to the RFPG cabinet.

• Apply RF to the Dees.

For more detailed instructions, refer to Chapter 11 in Direction 2233000.

1. Turn OFF the RFPG Circuit Breaker on the Mains Distribution Panel.

2. Open the rear door of the CCAB.

• Turn OFF the RFPG circuit breaker.

3. Refer to Illustration 7-21. Remove the TPSU front and rear covers.

• Turn OFF the TPSU Main Power Switch.

ILLUSTRATION 7-21TPSU MAIN POWER SWITCH

4. Inspect the TPSU for damage or loose parts.

• Check all the fast-on terminals for loose connections or broken wires.

5. Refer to Illustration 7-22. Remove the upper RFPG front and rear covers.

6. Remove the front TAU cover.

Page 217: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 217

ILLUSTRATION 7-22TAU (FRONT VIEW)

7. Check the TAU for damaged or loose parts.

8. Refer to Illustration 7-23. Check the shorting mechanism for free movement.

ILLUSTRATION 7-23TAU SHORTING MECHANISM

Press here

Page 218: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

218 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

9. Check the flow meter at the back of the RFPG cabinet.

• Make sure the flow rate is higher than 16 liter/minute.

10. Replace the front TAU cover.

11. Replace the front and rear RFPG covers.

12. Flip the TPSU Main Power Switch to the ON position.

13. Flip the RFPG control power switch in the CCAB to the ON position.

14. Refer to Table 7-3 . Compare the LED Matrix to the lights on the SCU in the CCAB.

15. The LEDs in the SCU measuring display should also light.

• All measurement indicators should display values near zero, EXCEPT the Dee volts reference, which should display a value of about 8.0.

16. Flip the RFPG circuit breaker in the MDP to the ON position.

17. Display the RFPG page on the MSS.

• Select STANDBY mode.

18. Verify the following values appear on the SCU measuring unit display:

• Heater voltage about 7.5 to 7.7v

Wait one minute, then check the for the following values:

• Grid voltage = -250v

• Screen voltage = 750v

• Anode voltage = 7.3 to 8.0kv

• Grid current = -114mA

• Screen current = 22mA

• Anode current about 0.07A

19. Refer to Table 7-4 . Compare the LED Matrix to the lights on the SCU in the CCAB.

20. Check the vacuum level on the SCU measuring display.

• If the value falls below 10-6 mbar, click NORMAL to start RF.

21. Set the Dee Voltage to 17kV.

22. After the voltage stabilizes, and remains stable for 2 minutes, increase the D- volt-age by 1kV steps to 25kV.

• Increase by 1kV, allow to stabilize for 2 minutes, then step up 1kV.

Page 219: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 219

23. When the voltage stabilizes at 25kV, check the SCU display for the following values (+/-10%):

• RF forward power: 4.3kW

• Reflected power: 0.05kW

• DPA Forward power: 8.8 = 88W

• DPA Reflected power: 0.15 = 15W

• Grid current: -114mA

• Screen current: 27mA

• Anode current: 1.5A

24. Increase the D- voltage by 1kV steps to 35kV.

Page 220: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

220 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

TABLE 7-3RFPG LED MATRIX - OFF STATUS

Load Phase Detector(Position 4 TE)

System Controller(Position 12 TE)

Tube Controller(Position 36 TE)

Interface 1(Position 44 TE)

Interface 2(Position 52 TE)

Signal and Status Signal and Status Signal and Status Signal and Status Signal and Status

1 HTL +24 l

2 RF INHIBIT

3

4 PULSE MODE

l

1 TC READY l 5 FIXED MODE

l

2 TUBE ON l 6 RESET l

3 TUBE READY

l 7 NORMAL MODE

l

4 DOOR ALARM

l 8 STANDBY l

1 5 EARTH ALARM

l 9 SPARK 9 ----

2 RVL (INT) 6 WATER ALARM

l 10 ERROR 10 ----

1 +15V l 3 DVR CLOSE 7 AIR FLOW ALAR

l 11 GRID NORMAL

11 ----

2 -15V l 4 DVR OK 8 HEATER ALARM

12 SCREEN NORM.

12 ----

3 +5V l 5 DET LIMIT 9 GRID ALARM

13 EHT NORMAL

13

4 +24V l 6 RF ENABLE 10 SCREEN ALARM

14 HEATER NORM.

14

7 INT LOOP SELECT

l 11 EHT ALARM 15 ---- 15 ----

8 -15V OK (SCU) 12 FAN ON 16 ---- 16 ----

13 HEATER ON l 17 WATER FLOW

17

14 GRID ON l 18 AIR FLOW 18

15 SCREEN ON

l 19 DOOR INT’LOCK

19 ACL

Page 221: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 221

TABLE 7-4RFPG LED MATRIX - STANDBY STATUS

16 EHT CON ON

l 20 EARTH STICK

20 STANDBY READY

l

21 21 STANDBY ERROR

22 RVL 22 START MODE

l

23 CONT FAULT

23 TUNING MODE

l

24 GEN. FAULT

24 DEE VOLTS OK

l

Load Phase Detector(Position 4 TE)

System Controller(Position 12 TE)

Tube Controller(Position 36 TE)

Interface 1(Position 44 TE)

Interface 2(Position 52 TE)

Signal and Status Signal and Status Signal and Status Signal and Status Signal and Status

Load Phase Detector(Position 4 TE)

System Controller(Position 12 TE)

Tube Controller(Position 36 TE)

Interface 1(Position 44 TE)

Interface 2(Position 52 TE)

Signal and Status Signal and Status Signal and Status Signal and Status Signal and Status

1 HTL +24 l

2 RF INHIBIT

3

4 PULSE MODE

l

1 TC READY l 5 FIXED MODE

l

2 TUBE ON 6 RESET l

3 TUBE READY 7 NORMAL MODE

l

4 DOOR ALARM

l 8 STANDBY

1 5 EARTH ALARM

l 9 SPARK 9 ----

2 RVL (INT) 6 WATER ALARM

l 10 ERROR 10 ----

Page 222: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

222 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

1 +15V l 3 DVR CLOSE 7 AIR FLOW ALAR

l 11 GRID NORMAL

11 ----

2 -15V l 4 DVR OK 8 HEATER ALARM

l 12 SCREEN NORM.

12 ----

3 +5V l 5 DET LIMIT 9 GRID ALARM

l 13 EHT NORMAL

13

4 +24V l 6 RF ENABLE 10 SCREEN ALARM

l 14 HEATER NORM.

14

7 INT LOOP SELECT

l 11 EHT ALARM l 15 ---- 15 ----

8 -15V OK (SCU) 12 FAN ON 16 ---- 16 ----

13 HEATER ON 17 WATER FLOW

17

14 GRID ON 18 AIR FLOW 18

15 SCREEN ON 19 DOOR INT’LOCK

19 ACL

16 EHT CON ON

20 EARTH STICK

20 STANDBY READY

21 21 STANDBY ERROR

22 RVL 22 START MODE

l

23 CONT FAULT

23 TUNING MODE

l

24 GEN. FAULT 24 DEE VOLTS OK

l

Load Phase Detector(Position 4 TE)

System Controller(Position 12 TE)

Tube Controller(Position 36 TE)

Interface 1(Position 44 TE)

Interface 2(Position 52 TE)

Signal and Status Signal and Status Signal and Status Signal and Status Signal and Status

Page 223: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 223

TABLE 7-5RFPG LED MATRIX - NORMAL MODE STATUS

Load Phase Detector(Position 4 TE)

System Controller(Position 12 TE)

Tube Controller(Position 36 TE)

Interface 1(Position 44 TE)

Interface 2(Position 52 TE)

Signal and Status Signal and Status Signal and Status Signal and Status Signal and Status

1 HTL +24 l

2 RF INHIBIT

3

4 PULSE MODE

l

1 TC READY l 5 FIXED MODE

l

2 TUBE ON 6 RESET l

3 TUBE READY

7 NORMAL MODE

4 DOOR ALARM

l 8 STANDBY

1 5 EARTH ALARM

l 9 SPARK 9 ----

2 RVL (INT) 6 WATER ALARM

l 10 ERROR 10 ----

1 +15V l 3 DVR CLOSE l 7 AIR FLOW ALAR

l 11 GRID NORMAL

11 ----

2 -15V l 4 DVR OK l 8 HEATER ALARM

l 12 SCREEN NORM.

12 ----

3 +5V l 5 DET LIMIT l 9 GRID ALARM

l 13 EHT NORMAL

13

4 +24V l 6 RF ENABLE l 10 SCREEN ALARM

l 14 HEATER NORM.

14

7 INT LOOP SELECT

11 EHT ALARM l 15 ---- 15 ----

8 -15V OK (SCU) 12 FAN ON 16 ---- 16 ----

13 HEATER ON 17 WATER FLOW

17

14 GRID ON 18 AIR FLOW 18

15 SCREEN ON 19 DOOR INT’LOCK

19 ACL

Page 224: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

224 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

16 EHT CON ON

20 EARTH STICK

20 STANDBY READY

21 DVL 21 STANDBY ERROR

22 RVL 22 START MODE l

23 CONT FAULT

23 TUNING MODE

l

24 GEN. FAULT 24 DEE VOLTS OK

Load Phase Detector(Position 4 TE)

System Controller(Position 12 TE)

Tube Controller(Position 36 TE)

Interface 1(Position 44 TE)

Interface 2(Position 52 TE)

Signal and Status Signal and Status Signal and Status Signal and Status Signal and Status

Page 225: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 225

7-8 Helium Cooling, LTF, and Target Support System Checks

7-8-1 Introduction

Most of the target support lines from the LTF and Target Cooling Manifold (TCM) are cur-rently unmarked. Follow the procedures in this section to make sure the Targets and corresponding support systems are correctly installed and leak free.

This manual assumes the target options are connected to the following ports:

• Target 1: 18F- Option; Single and Dual Extraction (page 226)

• Target 2: 11C Option (Refer to the MINItrace Maintenance Manual for detailed installation instructions.)

• Target 3: 15O Option (Refer to the MINItrace Maintenance Manual for detailed installation instructions.)

• Target 4: 13N Option (page 230)

• Target 5: Dummy (Proton) Target [All Systems]

• Target 6: 18F- Option; Dual Extraction only (page 226)

Your system may differ from this configuration. If so, select the target position that cor-responds to the location of the target on your system. If unsure of the target configura-tion on your system, check the configuration files on the system MASTER. 7-2 contains the instructions to check the configuration files.

Notice If the MASTER and MSS have different configuration file contents, the system won’t start. If you change the physical target port location, remember to update the MASTER configu-ration files by saving the MSS configuration to the GSU.

When you complete the corresponding step.

1. Make sure all the targets have been installed in the correct ports, and that all cur-rent sensing, cooling and product lines are securely attached.

2. Check all the physical connections. Make sure all the hoses, pipes and tubes have been correctly installed and securely fastened.

• Make sure the helium and water lines to the targets are correctly oriented. The brown gas line has a green stripe, and always attaches to the upper connector. The brown water line has an orange stripe, and always attaches to the bottom connector. Both lines have the same outside diameter (1/16") but different interior diameters.

3. If you didn’t fill and bleed the target cooling lines when you started the Secondary Water Cooling Unit, return to 7-3 and fill the target cooling circuit.

4. Press the VCU Cooling panel ON button to start the SWCU pump.

5. Make sure all the gas bottles are in place and connected.

Page 226: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

226 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

6. If necessary, turn on the gases and adjust the regulators.

• Appendix D contains the list of purity and pressures settings for the system gases.

7-8-2 F18- Option: Single and Dual Extraction systems

CAUTION If you are color blind in the red/green spectrum, carefully check the connec-tions, then mark or label the lines to prevent future problems. Recom-mended: Use a permanent marker to make series of rings around the gas line(s).

7-8-2-1 Check the Helium Cooling System

Display the Target handling screen on the MSS.

a. Display the MAIN MENU.

b. Click on the first target icon to open the 18F- Target menu page.

7. Click CONNECT TARGET.

8. Click SELECT TARGET to open the water valve (7) and start the Helium cooling com-pressor(s).

• The water flow indicator in the water cooling window changes from yellow to green.(If not, the entire process shuts down with error messages.)

• The He-cooling indicator turns ON.

• The He-cooling valves open and close as the He cooling system empties and fills.

• The Pressure increases to 18psi and the compressor continues to run.

9. Once the Pressure reaches 18psi, continue to monitor the system for 5 minutes.

• Make sure the system maintains pressure for five minutes without any error messages, alarms, or additional messages that it is filling the system with He.

• If the system cannot maintain pressure, or refills the system every minute or two, start looking for leaks.

10. After five minutes, click UNSELECT TARGET.

• The compressor should stop running.

Note: If you plan to operate the He compressor manually, click EMPTY before you click ON. You must empty the system before you can start it .

Page 227: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 227

7-8-2-2 Check the Gas Connections to the F18- Target

Make sure the gas line is brown with a green stripe, and is attached to the upper con-nector. The water line is brown with an orange stripe, and always attaches to the bottom connector. Both lines have the same outside diameter (1/16") but different interior diam-eters.

1. Physically disconnect the gas line from the upper connector on the target.

2. Click on the 1a valve to open the low pressure helium line to the target.

3. Place your finger over the end of the tube and check for the flow of gas.

4. Click on the 1a valve to close it .

5. Check that the gas stops flowing from the tube.

6. Click on the 1b valve to open the high pressure helium line to the target.

7. Place your finger over the end of the tube and check that the flow of gas is much stronger than before.

8. Click on the 1b valve to close it and stop the flow of gas from the line.

9. Reattach the brown and green line to the upper connector.

10. Click on the 1b valve to open the high pressure line to the target, and check that it takes less than one minute for the pressure to reach 300 to 320psi.

• IF the pressure exceeds 320psi, or it takes longer than one minute to reach pressure, adjust the regulator on the customer side of the gas manifold.

• IF you cannot reach pressure by adjusting the customer regulator, the line could be blocked. Locate the needle valve directly behind the P1 connector to the LTF. Back off one turn on the knurled silver knob for a few seconds, then retighten the knob one turn.

11. Click on the 2b outlet valve to release the target pressure.

12. Repressurize the target.

13. When the target pressure reaches 300 to 320psi, click on the 1b valve to close it .

14. Monitor the level for at least two minutes to make sure it doesn’t drop.

• IF the target pressure falls below 300psi during the two minute time period, tighten all the high pressure PEEK connections, and try again. If necessary, fill a spray bottle with soapy water, set it to the "mist" position and use it to check the system for leaks. You may also use SNOOP (available from plumbing supply stores) or the helium detector that ships with the MINItrace, to find any leaks.

15. Dual Extraction systems: Select Target 6 and repeat Step 1 through Step 14.

16. Check the product line connections to the hot lab:

a. Click on the 1a valve to open the low pressure helium line to the target.

b. Click on the 2a and 2b outlet valves to open the line to the hot lab.

Page 228: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

228 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

c. Check the outlet line in the hot lab to make sure gas is flowing from the tube.

d. Repeat the process on each active outlet line.

7-8-3 Check the F18- Target Water and Product Line Connections

The water line is brown with an orange stripe, and always attaches to the bottom con-

nector. A single line supplies both the 16O and 18O water to the 18F- target.

Notice Make sure you use the sterile, deionized 16O water during these tests. Do NOT use the

extremely expensive 18O water until specifically told to do so during the functional testing

phase of the start-up process. Use only 16O water to test the timing and connections of both LTF syringes.

1. Fill the 16O vial on the LTF with water, and insert a needle into the vial.

2. Move the MSS near the TSC.

3. Leave the valves in their current state, so the water doesn’t leave the LTF.

4. Click on the syringe icon on the MSS and watch the syringe fill in the LTF.

• The syringe should take about 10 seconds to fill.

5. Click on the syringe icon on the MSS and watch the syringe empty in the LTF.

• The syringe should take about 4 seconds to empty.

6. Continue to click on the syringe icon to fill and empty the LTF syringe while you check the timing.

• Too fast: The increased pressure could pop the needle out of the water vial.

• Too slow: The pump may not fill correctly; insufficient water to the target.

Note: The fill and empty times were set at the factory, and should be fine. If you need to adjust the fill or empty times, locate the screws at the top and bottom of the syringe body. Adjust the bottom screw to change the syringe speed and fill time. Adjust the upper screw to change the time to empty the syringe.

7. Remove the bottom (brown/orange) line from the target connector, and put it in a bottle, to catch the water.

8. Click on the syringe icon to fill the LTF syringe.

9. Click on valve 3 to open it . (Click on valve 4 when you test the 18O connections.)

10. Click on the syringe icon to empty the syringe.

• Check that a steady stream of water flows from the tube.

11. Reattach the water line to the bottom connector on the target.

Page 229: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 229

12. Fill the target with sterile water.

• Click on FILL WITH H216O.

-or-

• Click on FILL WITH H218O when you test the 18O connections.

13. Make sure the pressure reading on the MSS rises as the target fills with water.

14. Check the target connections for leaks.

15. Locate the bundle of tefzel lines (active line and spares) in the hot lab.

16. Place the active tefzel line(s) into a vial or bottle, to catch the water.

17. Click on EMPTY TO OUTLET 1.

• Make sure the water exits the correct line.

• Measure the water and compare the amount to the one recorded in the data sheets that arrived with the system. The two amounts should be the same.

18. Refill the target with sterile water.

• Click on FILL WITH H216O.

-or-

• Click on FILL WITH H218O when you test the 18O connections.

19. Make sure the pressure reading on the MSS rises as the target fills with water.

20. Click EMPTY TO OUTLET 2.

• Make sure the water exits the correct line.

• Measure the water and compare the amount to the one recorded in the data sheets that arrived with the system. The two amounts should be the same.

21. Move the vial of 16O to the 18O syringe and repeat Step 3 through Step 20 to test

the 18O connections.

22. Dual Extraction Systems:

a. Move the vial back to the 16O syringe.

b. Select Target 6 and complete Step 7 through Step 21.

18F- Target Connections tests successfully completed.

Page 230: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

230 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

7-8-4 Check the 13N Option Connections

DANGER METHANE GAS (CH4) IS HEAVIER THAN AIR, FLAMMABLE AND EXPLOSIVE. EXTINGUISH ALL OPEN FLAMES BEFORE CONNECTING THE GAS LINES.

1. Display the Target handling screen on the MSS.

a. Display the MAIN MENU.

b. Click on the fourth target icon to open the 13N- Target menu page.

2. Click CONNECT TARGET.

3. Click SELECT TARGET to open the cooling water valve and start the Helium cooling compressor(s).

4. Refer to Illustration 7-24. Make sure the PEEK line from the LTF to the target has a coil of 5 to 7m just before it enters the target.

5. Make sure the target has a filling volume of 2.5ml.

a. Fill the 16O vial on the LTF with water, and insert a needle into the vial.

b. Click on the syringe to fill it with water.

c. Replace the 16O vial on the LTF with an empty vial.

d. Click on the syringe to empty the contents back into the vial.

e. Measure the contents.

ILLUSTRATION 7-24PEEK LINE COIL ON 13N TARGET

6. Check the CH4 line connections, and open the gas valve.

a. Adjust the valve for 5bar pressure.

b. Click on the 1 valve to open the gas line to pressurize the target.

c. Check for a pressure reading of about 70psi.

d. Click on the 1 valve to close it .

Page 231: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 231

e. Monitor the pressure for 2 minutes to make sure it doesn’t drop.

f. Click on the 2 valve to release the target pressure.

7. Click on FILL TARGET .

• Check that the pressure reading rises above 70psi.

• Check the LTF and target connections for leaks.

8. In the hot lab, place the active product outlet line into a vial.

9. Click on EMPTY TARGET .

10. Measure the contents of the vial in the hot lab.

• The vial should contain 2.5ml of water.

13N Target Connection test successfully completed.

Page 232: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

232 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

7-9 Beam TuningFollow the procedures in this section to condition the system and tune the beam, to pre-pare the system for functional testing. This section assumes the Secondary Cooling Water, Vacuum, Magnet, and RF System start up procedures were successfully com-pleted.

7-9-1 Condition the System

Note: Return to this section any time you open the chamber. If you make a physical adjustment to the Ion Source or do anything to the interior of the vacuum chamber that exposes new metal, expect a significant increase in conditioning time.

1. If necessary:

a. Press the VCU Cooling panel ON button to start the cooling water pump.

b. Press PUMP at the VCU to pump down the chamber to the standby state.

2. Connect the Service PC (MSS) to the port on in the narrow CSC.

3. Display the BEAM CONTROL page.

4. Click GAS ON to clear the pipe to the Ion Source (IS).

5. The Vacuum chamber pressure will increase from the -7 range, to 1.5 to 2.5 x 10-5 when you turn on the gas.

• Let the chamber pump down with the gas on for at least 30 minutes.

6. After 30 minutes, click GAS OFF so you can change MSS pages.

7. Display the MAGNET SYSTEM page.

8. Click the magnet ON button.

9. Set the magnet current to the value listed on the factory data sheets.

10. Display the RF SYSTEM page.

11. Type/enter a Set Frequency value of 80%.

12. Click SAVE FREQUENCY to set the upper range limit for the frequency sweep.

13. Type/enter a Dee Voltage value of 25kV, which equals 50% of full power.

14. Click STANDBY.

• The system should take about one minute to transition from the STANDBY to the READY state.

15. When the STANDBY indicator changes to READY, click NORMAL.

• During the conditioning process, the Dee Voltage status changes from START MODE, to SPARKS and TUNING MODE as the system sets up the scanning fre-quency and Dee voltage.

Page 233: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 233

16. When the Dee Voltage status changes to a steady DEE VOLTS OK for 3 minutes, click on the UP arrow to increase the Dee Voltage.

• IF you don’t see a DEE VOLTS OK after 5 minutes, drop the Dee Voltage to 15kV, and restart the conditioning process.

17. Continue to increase the Dee Voltage, until the system reaches a steady DEE VOLTS OK for 5 minutes at 35kV (normal operating voltage).

18. During the Beam Tuning process, return to this section anytime you introduce a new variable that causes the system to spark.

• Drop the Dee Voltage to 25kV until the status changes to a steady DEE VOLTS OK, then increase the Dee Voltage back to 35kV. If the system doesn’t reach DEE VOLTS OK at 25kV, drop down to 15kV, and start from there.

7-9-2 Tune the Beam

Once the Dee Voltage status reaches a steady DEE VOLTS OK at the 35kV setting, you can start to tune the beam. Whenever the system starts to spark, return to the condi-tioning process. Dual Extraction systems tend to be more non linear than Single Extrac-tion systems until the IS current reaches 200mA.

1. Display the BEAM CONTROL page.

2. Click RF NORMAL to set the Dee Voltage to the value in the configuration file.

• The RF SYSTEM values displayed on this page are more of a mean, and not as "realtime" as the values on the RF SYSTEM page.

3. When the status changes to a steady DEE VOLTS OK, click GAS ON.

• The system will start to spark and retune the frequency. Allow the system to remain in this condition until it starts to stabilize.

4. When the status changes to a steady DEE VOLTS OK, click PROBE IN.

• The Flip-in Probe protects the target from the beam.

5. Click IS ON.

6. Type/enter a Current Set value of 10mA.

• Even though the field may display a value when you click IS ON, it’s probably the last typed value, which the system ignores, so you have to type in a new value.

• IF the system starts to spark when you enter the 10mA value, change the Cur-rent Set value to 0mA, and return to the conditioning process in section 7-9-1.

Note: When you set a new IS current, the IS Voltage should increase to about 900v, then slowly decrease as the actual IS Current value increases to the Set value. IF the ION SOURCE voltage goes above 1kV, check the cable connection to the Ion Source. (Especially if you have taken the IS assembly out of the vacuum chamber.) The coax cable has an extra long sleeve, which can deceive you into thinking it’s connected when it really isn’t .

Page 234: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

234 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

7. If the Dee Voltage is OK, and the current reading on the Flip-In Probe equals 1µA, wait one to two minutes, then increase the ION SOURCE Current Set value to the each of the following values for at least two minutes.

Note: If the system starts to spark, enter a value of 0mA, and return to the conditioning process.

When changing from a lower to higher current, or lowering the current to a non zero value, the system ramps up/down. When you set the current to zero, it goes immediately to zero.

• 20mA should produce a Flip-In Probe current of 2µA ±20%

• 30mA should produce a Flip-In Probe current of 3µA ±20%

• 40mA should produce a Flip-In Probe current of 4µA ±20%

• 50mA should produce a Flip-In Probe current of 5µA ±20%

• 100mA should produce a Flip-In Probe current of 10µA ±20%

• 200mA should produce a Flip-In Probe current of 20µA ±15%

• 300mA should produce a Flip-In Probe current of 30µA ±15%

• 500mA should produce a Flip-In Probe current of 50µA ±15%

• 1000mA should produce a Flip-In Probe current of 100µA ±15%

Note: IF you don’t see a Probe current of 100µA ± 15% on the probe at 1000mA IS cur-rent, then it’s time to check the Dee adjustments and the position of the Ion Source slit . Follow the maintenance and service instructions in Direction 2233000.

Page 235: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 235

7-10 Target System Start-upFollow the procedure in this section to check and adjust the collimators to center the beam on the corresponding target. If you added a target option during the installation, and had to install the target collimator, follow the procedure in Section 7-10-2, page 241, before you start this section.

WARNING RADIATION! ALWAYS MEASURE THE ACTIVITY WHEN YOU OPEN THE VACUUM CHAMBER DOOR, SO YOU KNOW HOW LONG YOU CAN STAY IN THE CHAMBER AREA. REMEMBER: DOSAGE LEVEL LIMITS VARY FROM COUNTRY TO COUNTRY.

CAUTION Always wear clean cotton or non-powdered examination gloves when work-ing in the vacuum chamber. Take care NOT to scratch the interior surfaces of the chamber.

1. Vent the chamber.

2. Shut off the System. (if on)

3. Open the shield doors.

4. Locate the Ion Source Tool Box. (Often stored in the empty TSC cabinet.)

• Remove the Paper Burner target and collimator adjustment tool from the Tool kit.

ILLUSTRATION 7-25PAPER BURNER TARGET

5. Remove the first target from the target mount, and replace it with the Paper Burner target. Leave the cooling lines attached to the original target.

• Attach the target’s current sensing line to the Paper Burner target.

• Make sure the Paper Burner is firmly seated in the bayonet mount.

WARNING RADIATION! YOU CAN ONLY LEAVE THE ORIGINAL TARGET IN PLACE IN THE SHIELD AREA IF YOU HAVE NOT BOMBARDED IT YET. IF YOU HAVE ALREADY BOMBARDED THE TARGET, YOU MUST REMOVE IT AND STORE IT INSIDE LEAD SHIELDING.

Page 236: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

236 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

6. Close the shield doors and press PUMP to start the vacuum system.

7. Attach the service pc to MSS port on the CSC panel.

8. Display the MAGNET SYSTEM page.

9. Click ON to turn on the magnet.

10. Set the current to 132 Amps. (Type in a value, don’t use the arrows.)

11. Display the BEAM CONTROL page.

• Password: scxscx

12. Click on RF STANDBY.

13. Click on PROBE IN.

14. Set the Foil holder 1 position to the value displayed for the corresponding target position in the Configuration Parameters window.

15. When the RF SYSTEM standby goes to the Ready state, click on RF NORMAL.

• Wait for Dee volts OK to stabilize. (no sparking allowed during this test)

• If necessary, return to section 7-9-1 and condition the system.

16. Click on Ion Source GAS ON.

• Make sure the RF SYSTEM window still displays dee volt , ok.

17. Select ION SOURCE (IS ON).

18. Set the Ion source to 100 mAmp, and wait for Dee volts to stabilize.

19. Adjust ion source current to produce about 4microamps on the probe, because the paper burner does NOT have cooling water lines.

20. Make paper targets out of business cards while waiting for the Dee volts to stabi-lize:

a. Cut a business card in half, width-wise.

b. Measure from the lower right corner of the card.

c. Draw a horizontal line 19.5mm above the bottom edge of the card.

d. Draw a vertical line 19.5mm from the right edge of the card.

e. Make about 6 cards per system target, including the dummy port.

Page 237: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 237

ILLUSTRATION 7-26PAPER CROSSHAIR DIMENSIONS

WARNING RADIATION! WEAR GLOVES AND PROTECTIVE EYE WEAR, AND USE FORCEPS TO INSTALL THE TARGET PAPERS. USE TOOLS TO SHIFT THE PAPER BURNER TARGET TO A NEW PORT, AND TO ADJUST THE COLLIMATOR BLADES. DO NOT TOUCH THE COLLIMATOR BLADES OR BOMBARDED PAPER BURNER TARGET WITH YOUR (GLOVED) HANDS.

21. Click on PROBE OUT.

22. Tune the magnet to produce the highest Foil 1 reading.

• Click on the MAGNET UP and DOWN arrow keys to optimize the foil 1 current reading.

23. Adjust the foil holder positions by small steps (10 to 20%) while watching the wave-form on the BEAM CONTROL page.

a. Click on the Foil holder 1 pos UP arrow to shift all current to the upper collima-tor.

b. Record the upper Foil 1 position value displayed in the Foil 1 number: field.

c. Click on the Foil holder 1 pos DOWN arrow shift all current to the lower collima-tor.

d. Record the lower Foil 1 position value displayed in the Foil 1 number: field.

e. Type the first value into the Foil 1 number: field.

24. Click on PROBE IN.

25. Click on IS OFF.

26. Click on RF STANDBY.

CAUTION Take Care! The Magnet is still ON. Remove all credit cards and mechanical watches. Use forceps to insert and remove the paper targets.

27. Write the target number, burn trial number and date along the top of the card.

28. Open the left shield door.

19.5mm

19.5mm

Page 238: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

238 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

29. Insert the paper target into the bottom of the burner with the cross facing the beam.

30. Close the left shield door.

31. Click on RF NORMAL.

32. Click on GAS ON.

33. Click on IS ON.

• Use the same IS current as before.

34. Click on PROBE IN.

• Read the probe current; make sure RF Frequency is the same as before.

• Wait for the Dee volts to stabilize.

35. Click on PROBE OUT.

• You should see all the beam current on the upper collimator.

36. Type/enter the Foil 1 position value you recorded for the lower collimator value into the Foil 1 number: field, to switch the current to the lower collimator.

37. Type the upper collimator value, then type the lower collimator value into the field 3 or 4 times for each value, to sweep the beam back and forth between the collima-tors.

Note: You may need to experiment with the number of times you enter the values. The number of times needed to sweep the beam across the collimator blades will increase as the paper thickness increases. Try not to over burn (blacken) the paper. It is better to under burn than over burn the paper target.

38. Click on PROBE IN.

39. Click on IS OFF.

WARNING RADIATION! WEAR GLOVES AND PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR WHEN YOU OPEN THE TARGET SHIELD DOOR AND REMOVE THE PAPER. ALWAYS MEASURE THE ACTIVITY WHEN YOU OPEN THE SHIELD DOOR.

40. Use forceps to remove the paper from the Paper Burner Target.

41. Refer to Illustration 7-27. Examine the burn mark.

• The burn mark on a liquid target should be centered horizontally, but slightly lower than center on the vertical axis.

• The burn mark on a gas target should be centered directly over the crosshair.

WARNING RADIATION! THE PAPER IS RADIOACTIVE (CARBON ISOTOPE). DO NOT TOUCH THE PAPER WITH BARE HANDS. STORE THE PAPERS IN A LEAD CONTAINER FOR AT LEAST 2 HOURS. IF POSSIBLE LEAVE THE PAPER IN THE CONTAINER OVER NIGHT.

Page 239: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 239

ILLUSTRATION 7-27PAPER TARGET FOR LIQUID TARGET

42. Repeat the test two or three more times at the current target location, to check for consistency, before moving on to the next target port.

• IF the beam is too far above or below the horizontal line, proceed to section 7-10-2.

• IF the beam position changes each time you repeat the test, call support.

43. Test each occupied target port on the system, including position five (proton target).

• Use a tool to shift the Paper Burner from one position to the next.

WARNING RADIATION! REMEMBER, THE PAPER BURNER TARGET BECOMES INCREAS-INGLY RADIOACTIVE THE LONGER YOU USE IT. ALWAYS USE A TOOL TO MOVE THE PAPER BURNER FROM ONE TARGET PORT TO ANOTHER. WHEN YOU FIN-ISH THE TEST, STORE THE PAPER BURNER IN A LEAD CONTAINER.

7-10-1 Resize the Collimator Opening

Follow the procedure in this section to reposition the collimator, to raise or lower the point where the beam strikes the target, without changing the collimator diameter.

Liquid targets are pressurized with helium to increase the boiling point of the target liq-uid. The gas forms a bubble at the top of the target chamber. The collimator is posi-tioned to direct the beam below the center point of the target, to avoid this bubble.

On gas targets, the collimator is positioned to direct the beam to the center of the tar-get.

1. Measure the collimator opening with calipers to determine the factory setting.

• The standard collimator diameter is about 6mm, but could be as large as 8mm.

Top

Page 240: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

240 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

2. Look at the burn mark on the paper target.

• IF the top of the liquid target burn mark -or- the center of the gas target burn mark falls below the horizontal line, raise the entire collimator.

• IF the bottom of the burn mark -or- the center of the gas target burn mark falls above the horizontal line, lower the entire collimator.

3. Determine the distance to move the beam.

a. Measure the distance between the actual and optimal burn mark location.

b. Divide this value in half. (Refer to the example on the next page)

4. Use metric drill bits to reposition the collimator while maintaining the original diam-eter.

Remember to keep the drill bits perpendicular to the angled target port when you insert them into the collimator opening to make the adjustments. (Refer to Illustration 7-28 and the example, on the next page.)

Example: The burn mark is 2mm too high, and the collimator diameter is 6mm.To shift the collimator down 1mm:

1. Loosen the bottom collimator blade.

2. Insert a 7mm drill bit into the opening, move the bottom blade against the bit and tighten into place.

3. Loosen the top collimator blade.

4. Insert a 6mm drill into the opening and move the top blade against the bit .

5. Tighten the top collimator blade.

6. Return to 7-10, on page 235.

Page 241: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 241

ILLUSTRATION 7-28TARGET COLLIMATOR

7-10-2 Install the Collimator and Resize the Opening

Follow this procedure only if the collimator blades are loose or you added another target option to the system during installation.

WARNING RADIATION! WEAR GLOVES AND PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR WHEN YOU OPEN THE TARGET SHIELD DOOR AND REMOVE THE PAPER. ALWAYS MEASURE THE ACTIVITY WHEN YOU OPEN THE SHIELD AND VACUUM CHAMBER DOORS.

1. Press VENT on the CSC panel to release vacuum.

2. Click SYSTEM OFF on BEAM CONTROL page to shutdown the MINItrace cyclotron in an orderly manner.

3. Remove Paper Burner target from the target bayonet mount.

4. Refer to Illustration 7-29. Attach the collimator adjustment tool to the bayonet mount.

• The 3mm center pin slides in and out of the adjustment tool.

Page 242: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

242 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

ILLUSTRATION 7-29COLLIMATOR ADJUSTMENT TOOL

5. Use a 3mm allen wrench to loosely fasten the collimator blades into place.

6. Use calipers to measure interior diameter of the collimator.

• Start with the standard collimator opening of 6mm in diameter.

7. Slide the center pin in and out of the tool while you make the adjustment.

• Slide the pin into the tool to check the center of the collimator blade opening.

• Slide the pin out while you reposition the blades.

8. After you size the collimator opening, remove the collimator adjustment tool, and replace it with the paper burner target.

9. Close the vacuum chamber door.

10. Place a new paper target into the paper burner, and close the shield door.

11. Press PUMP on CSC panel to start vacuum.

12. Display the MAGNET SYSTEM page.

13. Click ON to turn on the magnet.

14. Set the current to 132 Amps. (Type in a value, don’t use the arrows.)

• Make sure current goes up to 150, stays there, then goes back to the set value. Otherwise the beam may not reach the target.

Bayonet mount fits target mounting plate

3mm pin slides in and out during adjustment

Page 243: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 243

15. Display the BEAM CONTROL page.

• Password: scxscx

16. When Vacuum is OK on the BEAM CONTROL page, click RF NORMAL.

17. Click GAS ON.

18. Click IS ON.

• Use the same IS current as before.

19. Return to Step 34 on page 238. (7-10)

Page 244: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

244 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

7-11 Functional TestFollow the instructions in this section to test the normal system operation, from the MASTER. Use this test to verify that the system is ready for the final series of perfor-mance demonstrations, prior to customer acceptance of the system. The test procedure is almost the same for both single and dual beam. Where it is necessary the procedure is divided into individual single and dual beam instructions.

7-11-1 Required Equipment

• One vial filled with H216O (sterile distilled water)

• One empty vial

• Needles and Luel Connectors

• Dose calibrator (placed in the hotcell)

7-11-2 Radiation License

1. Check Appendix H or the copy of the site Radiation License. You cannot proceed with this section until the customer has this license.

7-11-3 Inspection

2. Inspect and verify the following:

• The hot cell provided by customer is complete.

• The dose calibrator is installed in the well.

• The exhaust in the Hot cell works.

• There is nothing in the hot cell to effect the exhaust.

• A negative pressure exists in the hot cell. Exhaust should be "ON" at all times during and after dose delivery to hot cell.

7-11-4 Operator Report

A production report automatically prints after each production. To make a test print, click on OPERATOR REPORT in the Main menu to open the Operator Report Window.

ILLUSTRATION 7-30CLICK ON OPERATOR REPORT

Page 245: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 245

ILLUSTRATION 7-31OPERATOR REPORT WINDOW

3. Type something into the operator report window, as a test.

4. Click on SAVE AND PRINT REPORT to test the printer.

7-11-5 Test Procedure

5. Single beam:

• Connect the output tefzel tube from the F18 target(s) to a vial.

• Insert a ventilation needle far enough into the top of the vial to allow the helium overpressure to escape, but not so far that the water from the target escapes.

Page 246: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

246 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

Dual beam:

• Connect the output tefzel tubes from target 1 and 6 to a vial.

• Insert a ventilation needle far enough into the top of the vial to allow the helium overpressure to escape, but not so far that the water from the target escapes.

6. Place the vial(s) in the dose calibrator and close the hotcell door.

• The dose calibrator should be calibrated for N13 Ammonia.

7. Refer to Illustration 7-32.

• Make sure the LTF has one vial of H216O (sterile distilled) water

ILLUSTRATION 7-32

LIQUID TARGET FILLER WITH VIAL OF H216O ON A SINGLE BEAM SYSTEM

8. If necessary, turn on the MASTER, and Login:

• Login: MINItrac

• Password: mini000

Refer to Illustration 7-33. When the MASTER successfully completes the applica-tions start-up, it displays the Main menu and highlights all the active selections. In the Illustration 7-33 example, the Switch Screen selection is inactive. On the actual screen, each active selection appears in a colored box. (This colored area is also referred to as "the button.")

Page 247: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 247

ILLUSTRATION 7-33MASTER MAIN MENU

9. Refer to Illustration 7-35. Click on SYSTEM STATUS to open the corresponding win-dow Illustration 7-35.

ILLUSTRATION 7-34CLICK ON SYSTEM STATUS

ILLUSTRATION 7-35SYSTEM STATUS WINDOW

10. Refer to Illustration 7-36. Click on MAINTENANCE in the Main menu to open the Maintenance Functions window.

Page 248: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

248 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

ILLUSTRATION 7-36CLICK ON MAINTENANCE

11. Refer to Illustration 7-37. Click on CYCLOTRON in the Maintenance Functions win-dow to display the selections. Click on START UP to set the cyclotron to standby mode.

ILLUSTRATION 7-37CLICK ON MINITRACE

12. Check the Cyclotron information in the System Status window (Illustration 7-38) for an indication that the Magnet is starting to ramp.

Page 249: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 249

ILLUSTRATION 7-38SYSTEM STATUS WINDOW

13. Refer to Illustration 7-39. Click on TRACER on The Maintenance Functions menu to open the Target Selection window.

ILLUSTRATION 7-39CLICK ON TRACER

14. Single Beam:

• Select (1) 18F-F to run the target maintenance on the corresponding 18F- tar-get.

• The number in parentheses represents the actual target position on the cyclo-

tron, usually position 1 for the 18F- target. If your system has multiple 18F- tar-gets, repeat this maintenance test on each one.

Page 250: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

250 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

• Make sure that the target is connected.You can do that from the drop-down menu CONNECT/DISCONNECT on the tracer page.

Dual Beam:

• Select target (1) 18F-F to run the target maintenance on the corresponding tar-get and do the same for target (6) 18F-F.

• Make sure that the targets are connected. You can do that from the drop down menu CONNECT/DISCONNECT on the tracer page.

15. Important:

DO NOT USE H218O (extremely expensive, heavy water used to produce 18F-)

Use H216O (sterile distilled water)

Single beam:

• Refer to Illustration 7-40. Click on HANDLE TARGET(S) to display a drop-down menu.

• Select FILL WITH H2(16)O.

Dual beam:

• Click on HANDLE TARGET(S) to display a drop-down menu.

• Select FILL WITH H2(16)O for both target 1 and 6.

ILLUSTRATION 7-40MASTER SCREEN TARGET MAINTENANCE

To run a production on a single beam system follow Step 16 to Step 22. To run a production on dual beam system, follow Step 23 to Step 33.

Single Beam:

16. When the magnet reaches its configured current of approximately 130A, select PRODUCTION from the Main menu, to open the Operator Signature and Media Sup-ply windows.

ILLUSTRATION 7-41SELECT PRODUCTION

Page 251: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 251

17. Type/enter or select the following at the Operator Signature window:

• Signature: Type/enter the default, PET (unless you changed or deleted it).

• Password: Type/enter the default , pet (unless you changed or deleted it).(Remember: UNIX based software is upper/lower case sensitive.)

• Current: Set the current to 10 µA.

• Time: Change the production time to 5 minutes.

18. Click on OK to start preparing for the production.

19. When the button activates, and the system starts to beep, click START IRRADIATION.

20. When the production finishes, select DELIVERY and record the time.

• The product is delivered to output 1.

21. Check the reading from the dose calibrator and correct for decay and rest activity.

22. Perform several shorter productions on H216O water to condition the new targets.

Gradually increase the target current and production time up to 20µA and 20 min-utes. The SAT yield should equal approximately 5 mCi/µA for a new and conditioned

F18 target when producing N13 on H216O.

Dual beam:

23. When the magnet reaches its configured current of approximately 130A, select PRODUCTION from the Main menu, click on target 1 in the selection drop down menu to open the Operator Signature and Media Supply windows.

24. Type/enter or select the following at the Operator Signature window:

• Signature:Type/enter the default , PET (unless you changed or deleted it).

• Password: Type/enter the default , pet (unless you changed or deleted it).(Remember: UNIX based software is upper/lower case sensitive.)

• Current: Set the current to 10 µA.

• Time: Change the production time to 5 minutes.

25. Click on OK to start preparing for the production.

26. When the button activates and the system starts to beep, click START IRRADIATION

27. When the time recording for T1 production has started, and the magnet tuning sequence has finished:

• Select PRODUCTION from the main menu.

• Click on target 6 in the selection drop down menu to open the Operator Signa-ture and Media Supply windows.

Page 252: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

252 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

28. Type/enter or select the following at the Operator Signature window:

• Signature:Type/enter the default , PET (unless you changed or deleted it).

• Password: Type/enter the default , pet (unless you changed or deleted it).(Remember: UNIX based software is upper/lower case sensitive.)

• Current: Set the current to 10 µA.

• Time: Change the production time to 5 minutes.

29. Click on OK to start preparing for the production.

30. When the button activates and the system starts to beep, click START IRRADIATION.

31. When production finishes, select DELIVERY for both target 1 and 6.

• The product is delivered to output 1.

32. Check the reading from the dose calibrator and correct for decay and rest activity.

33. Run several shorter productions on H216O water to condition the new targets.

Gradually increase the target current and production time up to 20µA and 20 min-utes. The SAT yield should equal approximately 5 mCi/µA for a new and conditioned

F18 target when producing N13 on H216O.

34. Refer to Illustration 7-37. Select MINITRACE on the Maintenance functions menu.

35. Refer to Illustration 7-37. Select MINItrace SHUT DOWN.

36. When the Magnet current reaches zero, close the Status window.

37. Rinse, empty and dry the targets. See direction 2232995-100, Standard Operation

Procedure (SOP) for MINItrace 18F- standard target.

38. Select EXIT on the Main menu to log out from the MASTER station.

Functional Test successfully completed.

Page 253: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence 253

ILLUSTRATION 7-42MASTER SCREEN -TARGET MAINTENANCE

Page 254: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

254 Chapter 7 —Start-up and Calibration Sequence

7-12 FDG Micro LabRefer to Direction # 2102963

Page 255: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix A —Cables 255

APPENDIX A — CABLES

Refer to Illustration A-1. The MINItrace system cables in Crate 7 and 8 are currently grouped into 10 runs. Table A-2 on page 257 contains the list of component designator definitions. The Basic Cable Block Diagram (Drawing CAC000-51003-00-3) shows the destinations of all the cables that run between subsystems. Refer to this drawing to run all the cables that arrive with one end still terminated in the CSC.

ILLUSTRATION A-1GROUP CABLE INTERCONNECT (MIS MAP) DIAGRAM

CSC

TSC

CYCL

CCAB RFPG

Group 5

Group 3

Group 6

Gro

up 4

Gro

up 1

a/ 1

b

Group 7

Group 9

MASTER

Group 8

Group 10

RadiationshieldGroup 2

Page 256: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

256 Appendix A —Cables

Refer to Table A-1 . Each cable group arrives packed in a separate box, in Crate 7 and 8. Due to the lengths and number of cables in Group 1, it arrives in two separate boxes.

TABLE A-1CABLE CRATE AND BOX LOCATIONS

MIS Group # Crate: Box Location

1a 7: J

1b Already mounted in the CSC (crate 7)

2 Already mounted on lamps/engine (crate 7)

3 8: G

4 8: J

5 8: H

6 8: I

7 8: J

8 8: K

9 Already mounted on magnet (crate 6)

10 8: L

Page 257: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix A —Cables 257

A-1 Component DesignatorsTABLE A-2COMPONENT DESIGNATORS

Designator Description Notes

CCAB Control Cabinet Electronics cabinet: GCU, PSARC, PSMC

CIC Customer Interface Connector Signal source for customer warning lights, alarms and interlocks

CSC Cyclotron Support Cabinet Cabinet attached to Right Rear (fixed) shield: supports the Vacuum, Target Cooling, Secondary Water Cooling, Radi-ation Shield Drive systems and CIC

CSP Cyclotron Supply Panel The interface between the customer supplied com-pressed air and chilled water inputs, and the MINItrace system.

CYCL CyclotronMINItrace Cyclotron, vacuum system (Diffusion pump, roughing vacuum pump) and Target system (Targets, Tar-get cooling unit and LTF/support gasses)

GCU General Control Unit In CCAB: interface between the MASTER and the cyclotron

GSPU Grid Screen Power Unit In RFPG

LTF Liquid Target Filler In TSC: extracts and delivers liquids to the (18F-) Fluorine and (13N) Ammonia Targets

MASTER The Master System The computer interface between the operator and cyclo-tron

MDP Mains Distribution Panel Customer Supplied Line In w/ Circuit Breakers (and Emergency Stop/Panic Switch)

MSS MINItrace Service System Service PC: used to start up and maintain the system

PDU Power Distribution Unit In CSC: supplies power to the vacuum system pumps, the helium compressor(s) and RSDU

PSARC Ion Source Power Supply In CCAB

PSMC Power Supply Magnet Coils Magnet Power Supply

RFPG Radio Frequency Power Generator Electronics Cabinet: SCU, GSPU, TPSU and TAU

RSDU Radiation Shield Drive Unit Opens and Closes the Shield doors

SCU Source and Control Unit In RFPG

SWCU Secondary Water Cooling Unit In CSC: Distributes cooling water to the magnet and power supplies

TAU Tube Amplifier Unit In RFPG

TCM Target Cooling Manifold Delivers cooling water and Helium to the targets

TPSC Tube Power Supply Unit In RFPG

Page 258: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

258 Appendix A —Cables

TSC Target Support Cabinet Cabinet attached to Left Rear (fixed) shield: supports the Liquid Target Fillers and Helium Cooling Compressor(s)

VCU Vacuum Control Unit In CSC: Controls and monitors evacuation of the magnet chamber

Designator Description Notes

Page 259: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix A —Cables 259

A-2 Cable List This section contains a list of the cables shipped in Crate 7 and 8. If the cable ships with one end attached to a subsystem, it will not appear in this list . Drawing CAC000-51003-00-3 (Cable Block Diagram) shows the subsystem interconnections.

TABLE A-3CABLE INTERCONNECTIONS

Installed MIS mapRun#

Cable Part Number. length in meters

From To

Unit Subsystem Type Unit Subsystem Type

1a 904780. 6

CSC ASC Board, P4

D25P CYCL(Target side)

Acc.Conn. Board, P1 (on TCM)

D25S

1a 904781. 6

CSC ASC Board, P6

D25P CYCL(Target side)

Acc.Conn. Board, P2 (on TCM)

D25S

1a 904779. 6

CSC ASC Board, P1

D37P CYCL(Target side)

Acc.Conn. Board, P3 (on TCM)

D37S

1b 907534. 5

CSC TPG, IKR SHV CYCL(Vacuum side)

Penning Cell(on Diff Pump)

SHV

1b 907569. 6

CSC TPG, TPR1 Amp. C91E P

CYCL(Vacuum side)

Pirani Cell 1(on Diff Pump)

Amp. C91E S

1b 907570. 6

CSC TPG, TPR2 Amp. C91E P

CYCL(Vacuum side)

Pirani Cell 2(on Diff Pump)

Amp. C91E S

1b 907571. 5

CSC TS, BV Open1 - 222 - 243 - 284 - 315 - 286 - 32Y/G - NC

CYCL(Vacuum side)

BV, 7 pole Plug(on Diff Pump)

Open1 - 12 - 23 - 34 - 45 - 56 - 6Y/G - NC

1b 907572. 5

CSC TS, RV Open1 - 222 - 253 - 294 - 335 - 296 - 34Y/G - NC

CYCL(Vacuum side)

RV, 7 pole Plug(on Diff Pump)

Open1 - 12 - 23 - 34 - 45 - 56 - 6Y/G - NC

Page 260: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

260 Appendix A —Cables

1b 907573. 3.6

CSC TS, VV Open1 - 232 - 27Y/G - NC

CYCL(Vacuum side)

VV, 3 pole Plug(on Diff Pump)

Open1 - 12 - 2Y/G - NC

1b 907574. 3.8

CSC TS, HVV Open1 - 232 - 26Y/G - NC

CYCL(Vacuum side)

HVV, 3 pole Plug(on Diff Pump)

Open1 - 12 - 2Y/G - NC

1b 907575. 5

CSC TS, HVV SW

Open1 - 372 - 353 - 374 - 36Y/G - NC

CYCL(Vacuum side)

HVV, Sw, 7 pole Plug(on Diff Pump)

Open1 - 32 - 43 - 54 - 6Y/G - NC

1b 907576. 4.3

CSC TS, DP T-SW

Open1 - 382 - 30Y/G - NC

CYCL(Vacuum side)

DP Temp Switch(on Diff Pump)

Open1 - 12 - 2Y/G - NC

1b 907578. 5

CSC CON 1 Open1 - CON1:22 - CON1:43 - CON1:6Y/G - 7

CYCL(Vacuum side)

RP Power Plug Power Socket1 - 1 2 - 23 - 3Y/G - PE

1b 907580. 5

CSC CON 3 Open1 - CON3:22 - CON3:4Y/G - TS:5

CYCL(Vacuum side)

DP 4 pin Plug(on Diff Pump)

Open1 - 22 - 3Y/G - 4

1b 907803. 4.8

CSC ASC Board, PC3:6

Open1 - 62 - 7Y/G - NC

CYCL(Vacuum side)

Magnet coil Temp Sw(on Diff Pump)

Open1 - 12 - 4Y/G - NC

Installed MIS mapRun#

Cable Part Number. length in meters

From To

Unit Subsystem Type Unit Subsystem Type

Page 261: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix A —Cables 261

2 907583. 3

CSC ASC Board,PC4:6

Open1 - 62 - 73 - 84 - 9Y/G - NC

Rad. Shield Right µSW Open1 - right sw:42 - left sw:33 - left sw:74 - right sw:8Y/G - NC

2 907584. 4

CSC ASC Board,PC5:1

Open1 - 12 - 2Y/G - NC

Rad. Shield Left Motor Open1 - + (plus)2 - - (minus)Y/G - NC

2 907585. 3

CSC ASC Board,PC5:3

Open1 - 32 - 4Y/G - NC

Rad. Shield Right Motor Open1 - + (plus)2 - - (minus)Y/G - NC

2 907586. 3

CSC ASC Board,PC5:10

Open1 - 102 - 8Y/G - 6

Rad. Shield Info. Lamps Open1 - 12 - 2Y/G - 0

3 907866. 14

CCAB PSARC JHV1

SHV CYCL(Vacuum side)

IS Filter Box P1 SHV

3 907808. 17

CCAB PSMC + Cable Shoe L44

CYCL(Vacuum side)

Magnet + Cable Shoe L44

3 907808. 17

CCAB PSMC + Cable Shoe L44

CYCL(Vacuum side)

Magnet + Cable Shoe L44

3 904774. 17

CCAB PSMC - Cable Shoe L44

CYCL(Vacuum side)

Magnet - Cable Shoe L44

3 904774. 17

CCAB PSMC - Cable Shoe L44

CYCL(Vacuum side)

Magnet - Cable Shoe L44

3 904775. 17

CCAB PSMC GRND

Cable Shoe L44

CYCL(Vacuum side)

Magnet GRND Cable Shoe L44

Installed MIS mapRun#

Cable Part Number. length in meters

From To

Unit Subsystem Type Unit Subsystem Type

Page 262: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

262 Appendix A —Cables

4 907881. 4.5

CSC PE Screw Cable Shoe

TSC PE Screw Cable Shoe

4 907582. 9

CSC CON 4 Open1 - CON4:22 - CON4:4Y/G - TS:4

TSC He Comp 1 Power plug

Power Socket1 - 12 - 2Y/G - PE

4 908535. 6

CSC CB5:2 Open1 - CB5:22 - TS:10Y/G - TS:11

TSC FAN Wire terminal1- Fast-on tab 12 - Fast-on tab 2Y/G - PE Screw

NEVER shorten the SKA cable. It must remain forty meters long in order to maintain proper RF feedback.

5 907868. 40

RFPG SCU SKA BNC CYCL Vacuum Tank BNC

6 907896. 13

CSC Cover Plate, MSS

D9S CCAB GCU, P3 D9P

6 904767. 10

CSC Conn Board, P7

D25S CCAB GCU, P13 D25P

6 904768. 10

CSC Conn Board, P2

D37P CCAB GCU, P14 D37S

6 904769. 10

CSC Conn Board, P3

D25S CCAB GCU, P15 D25P

6 904770. 10

CSC Conn Board, P5

D37S CCAB GCU, P17 D37P

6 904771. 10

CSC Conn Board, P8

D37S CCAB GCU, P18 D37P

6 907809. 13

CSC Input Module

Open1 - L12 - L23 - L34 - NY/G - GRND

CCAB MDC CB CSC Open1 - L12 - L23 - L34 - NY/G - GRND

Installed MIS mapRun#

Cable Part Number. length in meters

From To

Unit Subsystem Type Unit Subsystem Type

Page 263: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix A —Cables 263

7 904765. 5

CCAB GCU, P9 D37S RFPG SCU SK G D37P

7 904766. 5

CCAB GCU, P10 D15S RFPG SCU SK H D15P

7 907810. 8

CCAB MDC CB RFPG

Open1- Not con-nected2 - L23 - L34 - NY/G - GRND

RFPG TPSU TB 1 Open1- Not connected2 - L23 - L34 - NY/G - GRND

8 907869. 13

TSC Relay Board P1

D25S CCAB GCU, P19 D25P

8 907870. 13

TSC Relay Board P2

D25S CCAB GCU, P20 D25P

9 907550. 2

CYCL Single Extract. Motor P1 (next to target ports)

D9S CYCL(Target side)

Acc Conn Board, P4

D9P

9 907857. 2.2

CYCL Filter Board P1above target ports

D9S CYCL(Target side)

Acc. Conn Board, P7

D9P

10 904772. 40

CCAB Roof Con-nector

BNC MASTER Transceiver BNC

907867 RFPG TAU P27 EIA 1 5/8" (RF Cable)

CYCL(Vacuum side)

Vacuum Tank EIA 1 5/8"

Installed MIS mapRun#

Cable Part Number. length in meters

From To

Unit Subsystem Type Unit Subsystem Type

Page 264: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

264 Appendix A —Cables

A-3 Cable MatrixTABLE A-4CABLE PART ORDER NUMBER MATRIX

MIS mapRun# Cable Part Number(Label on Cable)

Cable PartOrder Number

1a XKA011 31001 xx 3 (729124) 904780. 6

1a XKA011 31001 xx 3 (729124) 904781. 6

1a XKA016 31001 xx 3 (729125) 904779. 6

1b XKA110 31001 xx 3 (729148) 907534. 5

1b CAC200 36020 xx 4 907569. 6

1b CAC200 36021 xx 4 907570. 6

1b CAC200 36022 xx 4 907571. 5

1b CAC200 36023 xx 4 907572. 5

1b CAC200 36024 xx 4 907573. 3.6

1b CAC200 36025 xx 4 907574. 3.8

1b CAC200 36026 xx 4 907575. 5

1b CAC200 36027 xx 4 907576. 4.3

1b CAC200 36029 xx 4 907578. 5

1b CAC200 36031 xx 4 907580. 5

1b CAC200 36049 xx 4 907803. 4.8

2 CAC200 36034 xx 4 907583. 3

2 CAC200 36035 xx 4 907584. 4

2 CAC200 36036 xx 4 907585. 3

2 CAC200 36037 xx 4 907586. 3

3 XKA110 31001 xx 3 (729148) 907866. 14

3 CAC000 36020 xx 4 907808. 17

3 CAC000 36020 xx 4 907808. 17

3 CAC000 36023 xx 4 904774. 17

3 CAC000 36023 xx 4 904774. 17

3 CAC000 36024 xx 4 904775. 17

4 CAC200 36053 xx 4 907881. 4.5

4 CAC200 36033 xx 4 907582. 9

4 CAC200 36055 xx 4 908535. 6

Page 265: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix A —Cables 265

5 XKA102 31001 xx 3 (901500) 907868. 40

6 XKA001 31001 xx 3 (729121) 907896. 13

6 XKA011 31001 xx 3 (729124) 904767. 10

6 XKA016 31001 xx 3 (729125) 904768. 10

6 XKA011 31001 xx 3 (729124) 904769. 10

6 XKA016 31001 xx 3 (729125) 904770. 10

6 XKA016 31001 xx 3 (729125) 904771. 10

6 CAC000 36021 xx 4 907809. 13

7 XKA016 31001 xx 3 (729125) 904765. 5

7 XKA006 31001 xx 3 (729123) 904766. 5

7 CAC000 36022 xx 4 907810. 8

8 XKA011 31001 xx 3 907869. 13

8 XKA011 31001 xx 3 (729124) 907870. 13

9 XKA001 3100 xx 3 (729121) 907550. 2

9 CAC205 31101 xx 3 (907857) 907857. 2.2

10 XKA100 31001 xx 3 (729141) 904772. 40

MIS mapRun# Cable Part Number(Label on Cable)

Cable PartOrder Number

Page 266: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

266 Appendix A —Cables

Notes and Comments:

Page 267: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix B —Connectors 267

APPENDIX B — CONNECTORS

B-1 Swagelok Tube Fitting ConnectionsThe 1/16", 1/8" and 3/8" lines use Swagelok Tube Fittings. This section contains a set of installation instructions for all three sizes. The connections are the same for all the types of pipes and tubes used on the system. However, the size of the pipe or tube determines

whether you tighten the nut 270o (3/4 turn) or 450o (1 and 1/4 turn).

Note: If you haven’t used a Swagelok tube fitting before, take one apart and examine the pieces. (Look for the shoulder, inside the Swagelok body) Put the fitting back together, and follow the instructions to insert the hose. Stop after Step 5 to exam-ine your work. After you make a couple of connections, you’ll get a feel for the pro-cess, and won’t have to check the clearance on the ferrules each time.

1. Make sure the end of the pipe or tube is round, has an even edge, and is free from burrs.

2. Refer to Illustration B-1. The pre assembled Swagelok connector consists of a body, two ferrules and a nut. The back ferrule fits into the front ferrule, and the both fer-rules nest inside the nut. There is also a tube insert to secure the tube connection.

ILLUSTRATION B-1SWAGELOK TUBE FITTING (3/8" SIZE)

3. Push the tube insert into the tube until the insert front and tube end are in line.Illustration B-2

ILLUSTRATION B-2SWAGELOK TUBE INSERT FITTING

Swagelok BodyFront Ferrule Back Ferrule NutTube insert

Tube insertfront

Page 268: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

268 Appendix B —Connectors

4. Loosen the nut, without removing it from the body, and push the tube or piping into the back of the nut, through both ferrules, until it just reaches the shoulder in the Swagelok body.

5. Then back off a millimeter or two. The end of the tube should clear the front ferrule by 2 or 3mm, but should not touch the shoulder in the Swagelok body. (Illustration B-1 and Illustration B-3)

• To check the clearance, remove the nut and push on the hose to expose the ferrules.

• The hose end should extend 2 or 3mm beyond the end of the front ferrule.

• If OK, pull the hose and ferrules back into the nut and reattach it to the Swagelok body.

ILLUSTRATION B-3HOSE CLEARANCE EXAMPLES

ILLUSTRATION B-4SWAGELOK COMPONENTS IN CORRECT ORIENTATION

6. Tighten the nut until it feels finger tight.

7. Make a reference mark on the tube at the 6 o’clock position.

Bad: Not enough clearance OK: Hose extends 2mm past the end of the front ferrule

After you OK the hose clearance, pull the ferrules back into the nut.

Page 269: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix B —Connectors 269

8. Hold the fitting body steady with one wrench and tighten the nut with another wrench:

• IF the pipe/tube has a 1/16" or 1/8" diameter, tighten the nut 270o (3/4 turn)

• IF the pipe/tube has a 3/8" diameter, tighten the nut 450o (1 and 1/4 turn)

ILLUSTRATION B-5SWAGELOK FITTING CONNECTED TO 3/8" PU LINE

Page 270: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

270 Appendix B —Connectors

ILLUSTRATION B-6EXAMPLES OF SWAGELOK TUBE FITTINGS

Helium Compressor

Magnet Cooling Lines

Page 271: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix B —Connectors 271

B-2 PEEK ConnectionsThe 18F- and 13N Target systems use PEEK tubes between the Liquid Target Filler and the Target. The LTF also has additional PEEK tubing and connections. Usually, the 1/16" PEEK tube uses the same Swagelok connectors as the 1/16" Tefzel tubes (B-1), but the PEEK tubes also use connections like the one shown in Illustration B-7 to provide a quick method to disconnect the Target from the LTF. The LTF vials also use needles with a sim-ilar fitting.

ILLUSTRATION B-7ALTERNATE PEEK TUBING CONNECTION

1. Insert the line into the connector, until it passes the shoulder inside the tip, and extends beyond the outer tip of the connector by a millimeter or two.

2. Screw the threaded end of the connector into the coupling (or threaded LTD com-ponent).

ILLUSTRATION B-8PEEK TUBING CONNECTIONS

ILLUSTRATION B-9TARGET PEEK CONNECTIONS

Insert tube here

Tube extends 1 or 2mm past tip Screw threaded tips into coupling

Target Current sensor (from Target Cooling Unit)

PEEK connectors

Page 272: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

272 Appendix B —Connectors

B-3 RF CableThe RF cable consists of a hollow inner copper conductor centered within a hollow outer copper conductor, and held in place with a spiral plastic spacer. Both conductors have corrugated ribs that act as threads. The RF cable arrives in a coil, usually with a connec-tor attached to at least one end.

• IF the cable has a connector attached to both ends, return to section 4-1-3.

• IF you must attach one or both connectors, follow the instructions in this sec-tion.

Note: You must take two restrictions into consideration to determine the length of the RF cable.

1. The cable may only be cut in increments of 1.41 meters (including the connectors)

2. You may not make a bend in the cable with a radius of less than 180mm (single bend) or 550mm (multiple bends).

Read all the information in the entire RF cable section (Section B-3-1 through B-3-3) at least once before you remove the ty-wraps and run the RF cable.

For best results:

• Decide how to run and suspend or support the cable from the RFPG to the top of the Cyclotron shield. Most MINItrace systems have the electronics cabinets in the same room as the Cyclotron, so the run should be fairly short and straight.

• Measure the length of the planned cable run and round it up to the nearest seg-ment.

• Measure and cut the cable to length.

• Cover the unfinished end, to prevent any dirt or debris from entering the cable.

• The finished end should have about 50mm of insulation removed from the cable (about 20mm above the connector). Attach this end to the RFPG cabinet connec-tion.

• Run the RF cable from the RFPG to the top of the MINItrace shield.

• Don’t make the RFPG connection until after you finish the cable end at the magnet.

• Insert the unfinished cable end into the shield first, then attach the connector.

Page 273: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix B —Connectors 273

ILLUSTRATION B-10COILED CABLE

B-3-1 Determine the RF Cable Length

Normally, the run between the RFPG cable and MINItrace Cyclotron is fairly short and straight, because the electronics cabinets are usually located in the same room as the Cyclotron. If the cabinets are located in a different room, you may have to make some extra bends in the cable. Refer to Illustration B-10. Examine the coiled cable before you cut the ty-wraps. If you make bends in the cable with a sharper turn, the bends become permanent. So, rather than bending the cable around a corner, you must curve the cable around it. (REMEMBER to add the excess length of this curve to the cable measure-ment.)

Note: To negotiate a really sharp turn, you may have to make a cut in the cable, and

insert a 90o connector. If this is the case, call the factory in Uppsala for advice and information.

IF possible, make a dry run and measure the distance on the RF cable. Otherwise, use string (rope) or one of the other cables to make the run and measure the distance.

• Refer to Illustration B-10. If you make any bends with a smaller radius than these loops, the bend becomes permanent. Plan every bend carefully.

To determine the final cable length:

1. Measure the exact metric length of the cable run you plan to follow, from the con-nector on the RFPG cabinet to the connector on the magnet (Illustration B-11), including the extra wide curves and loops needed to negotiate corners or complex penetrations.

2. Round this figure up to the nearest 1.41meter increment

• Ex: 5.64, 7.05, 8.46, 9.87, 11.28, 12.69... up to a maximum length of 25.38m

3. Measure the cable one more time, and cut the cable to length.

Sharper bends than this become permanent.Make a curve in the cable to negotiate asharp turn, or follow an alternate route.

Page 274: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

274 Appendix B —Connectors

ILLUSTRATION B-11RF CABLE CONNECTION TO MAGNET

B-3-2 Locate and Disassemble the Connector

Locate the RF Cable connector. The connector ships, pre-assembled, in a plastic bag, along with a set of generic instructions. This section contains the specific instructions for this application.

The connector consists of:

• A termination sleeve that fits over the outer conductor and rests against the cable insulation.

• A threaded socket that screws into the inner conductor.

• An inner subassembly that fits over the inner conductor and threaded socket.(You do not have to remove the inner subassembly from the connector head when you disassemble the connector.)

• An o-ring gasket seal between the termination sleeve and connector head.

• A flanged connector head that slides over the inner subassembly and fastens to the termination sleeve with six cap head screws.

• Six cap head screws and washers, and one left-threaded screw and copper washer.

• Two black plastic plugs and a copper gasket (not used).

Page 275: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix B —Connectors 275

ILLUSTRATION B-12RF CABLE CONNECTOR

1. Remove the connector, instructions and bag of hardware from the plastic bag.

2. Use a 5mm allen wrench to remove the two cap head screws that hold the assem-bly together.

3. Remove the left threaded (5mm) cap head screw from the connector head, and remove the threaded socket from the center interior of the connector head.

4. Locate and remove the following items from the installation gang box:

• 35mm pipe jig (See Illustration B-13)

• Hacksaw

• Flanging tool (Refer to Illustration B-14)

• Adhesive bandages and ointment (See Caution)

CAUTION The edges of the RF cable are sharp enough to cut flesh and tear clothes. Take care when you handle or cut the conductors, or attach and remove the flanging tool.

Termination sleeve

Gasket seal (o-ring)

Remaining

Connector head (with inner subassembly)

Left-threaded screwThreaded socket

These screws held the assembly together during shipment

hardware

Page 276: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

276 Appendix B —Connectors

ILLUSTRATION B-13PIPE JIG

ILLUSTRATION B-14FLANGING TOOL

This shoulder butts against

Slide this end over the insulator

Insert hacksaw blade in slotfor clean, straight cut, 35 mmfrom the edge of the insulator.

Outer view

35mm from inner shoulder Inner view

the insulator.

Insert hacksaw blade in slotfor clean, straight cut, 35 mmfrom the edge of the insulator.

to slot

Flanging wheel

Cutter

Adjustment

You may have to trim the innerconductor before this bar willslip all the way into the notch and lock into place.

wheel

Page 277: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix B —Connectors 277

B-3-3 Attach the Connector to the Cable

Cut the Cable to its Finished Length

The actual length of the RF cable equals the distance from the outer connector edge to outer connector edge. So, the first step is to cut 80mm (8cm) off the unfinished edge, to compensate for the length added to the cable by the connector head.

1. Measure 80mm from the unfinished edge of the cable and mark the cable for cut-ting.

2. Measure 55mm from the cut mark, and evenly wrap a piece of masking tape around the cable, so the upper edge meets the 55mm mark.

3. Cut the cable at the mark you made 80mm from the unfinished edge.

• Try to make a straight (perpendicular) cut.

• If possible, stuff a cloth into the cable opening and/or tilt the cable downward so the debris (swarf) created while cutting stays out of the interior of the cable.

4. After you make the cut, tap the cable against a solid surface to remove any chips from the interior of the conductors.

ILLUSTRATION B-15UNFINISHED CABLE END WITH 55MM GUIDE

Remove the Insulation from the Outer Conductor

1. Remove the cable insulation from the newly cut edge, to the masking tape at the 55mm mark.

• Using the tape as a guide, take a knife or razor blade and trim the insulation as evenly as possible along the edge of the tape, and as perpendicular as possi-ble to the outer conductor. The goal is to create an even and solid edge to butt against the termination sleeve.

2. Clean the sticky black adhesive substrate (glue) off the outer conductor with sol-vent.

• If available, use a heat gun to loosen (and melt) the adhesive. Take care not to warp the remaining insulation with the heat gun.

80mm cut 55mm Guide - Remove insulation back to edge of tape.

Page 278: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

278 Appendix B —Connectors

ILLUSTRATION B-16RF CABLE WITH INSULATION REMOVED AND OUTER CONDUCTOR CUT TO LENGTH

Cut the Outer Conductor to Length

1. After you clean the adhesive from outer conductor, tap the cable against a solid surface to remove any debris from the interior, then gently clamp the cable into the vise.

2. Refer to Illustration B-13. Slip the pipe jig over the end of the cable, and slide it down the outer conductor until the inner shoulder rests firmly against the edge of the insulation.

3. Insert the hacksaw blade into the slot, and cut through the outer conductor.

4. Keep turning the jig and, if necessary, adjusting the hacksaw blade, to trim away the excess 20mm of outer conductor, while leaving the inner conductor intact.

5. Use diagonal cutters to trim back any excess spiral plastic spacer.

6. Refer to Illustration B-17. When you finish, the outer conductor should measure 35mm from insulation to outer edge. The inner conductor should now stick out an additional 20mm from the outer edge of the outer conductor.

ILLUSTRATION B-17CUT OUTER CONDUCTOR TO 35MM

Attach the Termination Sleeve to the Cable

1. Refer to Illustration B-18. Slide the Termination Sleeve over the end of the cable, until the threads in the outer edge engage the corrugated ribs of the outer conduc-tor. Then, screw the termination sleeve onto the outer conductor, until the inner edge of the sleeve rests against the cable insulation.

Remove adhesive residue with solvent

Trim outer conductor back to 35mm

Leave inner conductor alone

Page 279: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix B —Connectors 279

ILLUSTRATION B-18TERMINATION SLEEVE ON RF CABLE

2. Refer to Illustration B-14. The Flanging tool has a flanging wheel and a cutting bit attached to the knurled assembly on the handle. Pull up on the knurled assembly and rotate it to position the flanging wheel as close to the collar as possible. (Later, you will rotate the cutter into position to trim away the excess copper from the outer conductor)

3. Refer to Illustration B-14 and Illustration B-19. The collar of the flanging tool has 4mm cap head captive screws. Slip the collar of the flanging tool over the end of the cable, and attach it to the Termination Sleeve with the captive screws

ILLUSTRATION B-19ATTACH FLANGING TOOL TO TERMINATION SLEEVE

4. Refer to Illustration B-20. Slowly swing flanging assembly upward, and see if you can slip the bar on the assembly into the notch on the collar. (If you followed the instructions, you probably can’t .) Trim away a millimeter or two of the inner con-ductor with the hacksaw, and try again.

• When you finish, the inner conductor should rest against the flanging assem-bly and the bar should drop into the collar. Don’t fasten the bar into place yet.

The corrugated ribs of the outerconductor act as threads. TheTerminator sleeve screws ontothe outer conductor.

Notch on collar

Adjustment wheel

Page 280: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

280 Appendix B —Connectors

ILLUSTRATION B-20DETAIL OF INNER CONDUCTOR AND FLANGING ASSEMBLY

5. Refer to Illustration B-20 and Illustration B-21. Turn the notched wheel at the bot-tom of the flanging assembly to position the flanging wheel between the inner and outer conductors. Then drop the bar into the notch on the collar. Carefully tighten the knurled screw on the bar to snug the assembly into place. When you finish:

• The inner conductor should just rest against the flanging assembly.

• The flanging assembly should be parallel to the collar/termination sleeve.

• The flanging wheel should be positioned between the inner and outer conduc-tors, with the edge resting lightly against the outer conductor. (Notched wheel adjusts position)

• The bar should fit all the way into the notch on the collar, perpendicular to both the collar and the flanging assembly.

Swing flanging assembly upwardand lock into notch on collar withthumb screw

If it interferes, trim outer conductoruntil bar on flanging assembly fitsinto collar notch. (See Detail)

Flanging assembly must be parallel to collar inorder for bar to slip into notch on collar andlock into place.

Tighten knurled screw to lock bar

Adjust this notched wheel to movethe flanging wheel against or awayfrom the conductor.

Page 281: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix B —Connectors 281

ILLUSTRATION B-21EXTREME CLOSE-UP OF FLANGING WHEEL

6. Refer to Illustration B-20 and Illustration B-21. Turn the handle slowly and smoothly.

• As you turn the handle, the flanging tool folds the outer conductor back against the Termination Sleeve without splitting the conductor. Then, it presses the conductor firmly against the Termination Sleeve, which in turn presses the Termination Sleeve firmly against the insulation.

• If necessary, adjust the notched wheel to change the relationship between the flanging wheel and the outer conductor (increase or decrease the pressure.)

7. Continue to turn the handle and adjust the notched wheel until the flanging wheel has completely flattened the outer conductor against the Termination Sleeve.

8. Loosen the screw and temporarily slip the flanging tool bar out of the notch on the collar. Pull up on the knurled section of the flanging assembly and rotate the flang-ing wheel out of the way, and the cutting bit into its place.

9. Reattach the bar to the collar, and adjust the notched wheel until the cutting bit rests against the folded back portion of the conductor.

10. Refer to Illustration B-22.Turn the handle slowly and smoothly. The cutting bit trims excess material away from the flanged portion of the conductor as you turn the handle. The edge is still sharp, so take care.

11. After you trim excess copper from the flanged edge, you may remove the flanging tool from the Termination Sleeve.

• Loosen the knurled screw, remove the bar from the notch in the collar, and let the flanging assembly hang from its hinge.

• Loosen the 4mm cap head screws to detach the flanging tool from the Termi-nation Sleeve.

• Move the flanging wheel back into its position nearest the collar, to set the flanging tool up for the next connector, before you return the tool to the box.

Position flanging wheel betweeninner and outer conductor beforelocking flanging assembly bar into place.

The flanging wheel presses the edgeof the outer conductor against theTermination Sleeve to fasten it into place.

Page 282: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

282 Appendix B —Connectors

ILLUSTRATION B-22TRIM EXCESS COPPER FROM CONDUCTOR

Finish the Connector Assembly

1. Refer to Illustration B-23. Use the hacksaw to trim the inner conductor to extend 11mm from the outer edge of the Termination Sleeve/flanged end of the outer con-ductor.

• Shake any debris (swarf) out of the cable.

ILLUSTRATION B-23TRIM THE INNER CONDUCTOR TO LENGTH

2. Use a pair of pliers to remove any burrs, dents and bends from the edge of the inner conductor.

3. Refer to Illustration B-24. Screw the Threaded Socket into the inner conductor.

• The narrow end of the socket is notched, to accommodate a flat blade screw-driver.

11mm from outer edge of termination sleeve to outer edge of inner conductor

Remove dents andbends from innerconductor

Page 283: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix B —Connectors 283

4. Use a flat blade screwdriver to adjust the Threaded Socket, until the outer edge extends 23mm from the outer edge of the Termination Sleeve.

ILLUSTRATION B-24SCREW THREADED SOCKET INTO CENTER CONDUCTOR

5. Refer to Illustration B-25. After you adjust the height of the Threaded Socket, use a small hammer, or a roll punch and hammer, to evenly fold the edges of the inner connector over the shoulder of the Threaded Socket.

• Keep working around the circumference of the socket, until the inner conduc-tor is evenly hammered into place.

ILLUSTRATION B-25FOLD INNER CONDUCTOR OVER THREADED SOCKET

Use a flat blade screwdriver to adjust height of Threaded Socket.

23mm from tip of Threaded Socketto outer edge of Termination Sleeve

Use a hammer to fold the inner conductor against the socket shoulder.

Use a hammer and roll pin punch.

O-ring fits into this groove

OR

(see picture below)

Page 284: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

284 Appendix B —Connectors

6. Remove the o-ring gasket from the parts bag, and slip it into the groove beneath the outer lip of the Termination Sleeve.

7. Slide the Connector Head over the Termination Sleeve and Threaded Socket assem-bly and align the holes in the Connector Head with the threaded holes on the Termi-nation Sleeve.

• Slide a steel washer down the shaft of each of the six 5mm cap head screws.

• Fasten the Connector Head to the Termination Sleeve, and use your fingers to start the screws, and barely fasten them into place.

8. Use a 5mm allen wrench to cross-tighten the screws:

• Tighten down one screw, then tighten down the screw directly opposite it

(180o).

• Continue to fasten down each pair of screws, until all three sets are firmly fas-tened. (When you tighten one set of screws, the other two sets will become loose until you’ve completely clamped the Connector Head to the Termination Sleeve, and compressed the gasket.)

• When all three sets of screws feel tight, try each screw in turn, until you have "tightened" your way once around the circumference of the Connector Head. Try the first screw again, and if it moves, tighten once more in the opposite direction around the circumference of the Connector Head.

9. Slide the copper washer down the shaft of the left-threaded screw, and insert it into the center of the connector head, and into the Threaded Socket you inserted into the inner conductor.

10. After you firmly tighten the left-threaded screw, remove the two black plugs from the parts bag, and insert them into the threaded holes in the Termination Sleeve. (All you should have left over is a copper gasket.)

ILLUSTRATION B-26FINISHED CABLE

Gas fitting not used; you may remove it if it gets in the way when you run the cable.

Page 285: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix B —Connectors 285

Expose the Conductor at the RFPG End of the Cable

If you had to attach both connectors to the raw RF cable, you must expose 50mm of the outer conductor at the RFPG end of the cable to make the grounding connection at the top of the cabinet. If the cable arrived with one connector attached, the conductor should already be exposed at the finished end. Attach the end with the exposed conduc-tor to the RFPG cabinet connector after you make the connection at the magnet end.

1. Measure and mark the first cut line 20mm from the edge of the connector.

2. Measure and mark the second cut line 70mm from the edge of the connector.

3. Evenly wrap a piece of masking tape around the cable and along the edge of each cut mark, exposing the 50mm of insulation you will remove from the cable.

ILLUSTRATION B-27EXPOSE THE CONDUCTOR AT THE RFPG END OF THE CABLE

4. Using the pieces of tape as a guide, take a knife or razor blade and trim the insula-tion as evenly as possible along the edge of each tape, and as perpendicular as possible to the outer conductor.

5. Remove all the insulation from the 50mm area between the two pieces of tape.

6. Clean the sticky black adhesive substrate (glue) off the outer conductor with sol-vent.

• If available, use a heat gun to loosen (and melt) the adhesive. Take care not to warp the remaining insulation with the heat gun.

7. Remove the tape and fasten the finished cable to the RFPG cabinet connector.

8. Refer to Illustration B-28. Fit the grounding collar plates around the cable, and make sure they fit against the exposed conductor.

• If necessary, trim back any excess insulation until only exposed conductor makes contact with the grounding collar.

9. Return to Section 4-1-3 on page 99 to install the RF cable.

20mm cut line 70mm cut line

Remove 50mm of the insulation to expose the outer conductor

Page 286: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

286 Appendix B —Connectors

ILLUSTRATION B-28MAKE SURE THE GROUNDING COLLAR FITS AGAINST THE CONDUCTOR

When Complete

RF Cable Finished

Final Cable Length _____________m

Page 287: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix B —Connectors 287

Notes and Comments:

Page 288: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

288 Appendix B —Connectors

Page 289: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix C —GCS Configuration Values 289

APPENDIX C — GCS CONFIGURATION VALUES

Use the tables in this appendix to create a hard copy of the configuration values that were established during the staging and testing of this system at the manufacturing facility. Display the configuration pages on the service pc (MSS) and copy the system’s parameters into the Actual Value column in the corresponding table. Then, if anything happens to corrupt the system configuration (and backup floppy diskette) you can use these values to restore the system.

Date these values were recorded: ________________________________________

Values recorded by: __________________________________________________

TABLE C-1TABLE OF NOMINAL ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM VALUES

Parameter (1) F (2) C (3) O (4) N (6) F

Pressure set [psi] 150 - - - 150

Max variance [psi] 10 20 30 10 10

Max leak pressure [psi] 5 20 20 5 5

Max pressure [psi] 400 400 400 150 400

Min pressure [psi] 35 80 80 45 35

Fill time [s] 10 10 5 10 10

Stabilize time [s] 5 5 5 5 5

Empty time [s] 120 30 5 120 120

Flush time [s] - - - - -

Leak time [s] 30 20 20 30 30

Dry time [min] 20 - - 30 20

Transport time [s] - - - - -

Active trap time [min] - 10 - - -

Startup I probe [uA] Loss probe/foil [%] I psmc [A]

Startup I [mA] Loss foil/target [%]

IS life length [Ah] Extr. foil wear [mAh]

Page 290: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

290 Appendix C —GCS Configuration Values

TABLE C-2TABLE OF ACTUAL ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM VALUES

Parameter (1) F (2) C (3) O (4) N (6) F

Pressure set [psi]

Max variance [psi]

Max leak pressure [psi]

Max pressure [psi]

Min pressure [psi]

Fill time [s]

Stabilize time [s]

Empty time [s]

Flush time [s]

Leak time [s]

Dry time [s]

Transport time [s]

Active trap time [min]

Startup I probe [uA] Loss probe/foil [%] I psmc [A]

Startup I [mA] Loss foil/target [%]

IS life length [Ah] Extr. foil wear [mAh]

Page 291: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix C —GCS Configuration Values 291

TABLE C-3ACCELERATOR CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS

Parameter Description Typical Value

Actual Value

Magnet System

itop Maximum limit for magnet current 150A

thold Time to stay at maximum current during Magnet ramp-up 60s

istep Ramping speed 1.00A/s

iproton Current during proton production ≈133.00A

increasing current Compensation for temperature changes in the magnet during long production runs from the Master (every 20 minutes)

40.mA

RF System

U Dee Operating DEE voltage during proton production 35kV

scan start pos p (freq) 75%

Dee scale Scaling factor for the conversion of DEE voltage read signal into true kilovolts and displayed to the operator

225

phase set -5.0 deg

Ion Source System

is operation time 2Ah

is life length 1000Ah

max arc current 1300mA2000mA (future)

startup arc current 100mA

Extraction System

i probe start up Maximum current for the Flip-in probe at Ion Beam start up 15µA

probe/ foil loss max Maximum Ion Beam loss between Flip-in probe and active foil

80%

foil/ target loss max Maximum Ion Beam loss between Active Foil and Active Target

20%

Global

ethernet port number Ethernet port number (Check/etc/services on master) 3456

master TCP IP addr Master System TCP/IP address (Check/etc/hosts on master) 192.0.4.30

Foil Diary

maximum foil wear Maximum foil lifetime 1.0mAh

Page 292: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

292 Appendix C —GCS Configuration Values

Notes and Comments:

Page 293: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix D —MINItrace Gas Purity and Pressure Settings 293

APPENDIX D — MINITRACE GAS PURITY AND PRESSURE SETTINGS

This appendix contains the list of currently available MINItrace target system options. Recommended: Highlight the option(s) on your system, to determine what gases and pressures should be present.

TABLE D-1GAS PURITY, PRESSURE, PRESSURE RANGE FOR AUXILIARY SYSTEM

TABLE D-2GAS PURITY, PRESSURE, PRESSURE RANGE FOR TRACER SYSTEM

AuxiliarySystem Gas Purpose

Quality(Minimum purity)

PressureMPa(bar) (psi)(or flow, ml/min)

± MPa(bar) (psi)

UtilizesSupplyPanel? Note

Ion Source H2 Operation gas

5.0 0.5 MPa(5 bar)(73 psi)

±0.02MPa(±0.2 bar) (±29 psi)

Yes Pressure range determined by using a frit and setting hydrogen pressure on the regulator.

All targets He Cooling 4.5 0.15 MPa(1.5 bar) (22 psi)

±0.05 MPa(±0.5 bar)(±7 psi)

Yes -

Tracersystems Gas Purpose

Quality(Minimum purity)

Pressure*(flow)

Pressure range

UtilizesSupplyPanel? Note

18F- He Transport gas

5.5 Note: Regula-tor provided by GE!0.5 MPa [5 bar] [73 psi]

±0.2 MPa[±2 bar] [±29 psi]

Yes Tube from bottle splits in two lines by means of extra regulator on Sup-ply Panel.

18F- He Operation 5.5 2.5 MPa [25 bar] [363 psi]

OG: ±0.1 MPa[±1 bar] [±14 psi]

Yes

Page 294: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

294 Appendix D —MINItrace Gas Purity and Pressure Settings

13N-NH3CH4(Methane)

Operation transport

5.5 0.4 MPa

[4 bar]

[58 psi]

-0.1 MPa+0.2 MPa-1 bar+2 bar-14 psi+29 psi

Yes Long tubing and vertical distance between cyclo-tron and Radio-chemistry System may require higher pressure.

11CO21%O2/N2

Target gas 1% O2: 3.5N2 : 5.5

0.9 MPa *)[9 bar] [130 psi]

±0.1 MPa[±1 bar] [±15 psi]

Yes -

N2 Transport gas

5.5 0.3 MPa[3 bar] [45 psi] (Flow: 400 ml/min)

±0.1 MPa[±1 bar] [±15 psi] (±50 ml/min)

Yes Set pressure to 2.5 bar and adjust the flow with the nee-dle valve.

H215O 1%O2

/15N2

Target gas 1% O2: 3.015N2 : 3.0

0.9 MPa *)[9 bar] [130 psi]

±0.1 MPa[±1 bar] [±15 psi]

No Very expensive gas.

5%H2 + Ar

Transport gas

H2 : 3.0 Ar : 5.5

0.3 MPa[3 bar] [44 psi] (Flow: 400 ml/min)

±0.1 MPa[±1 bar] [±14 psi] (±50 ml/min)

Yes Adjust pressure to achieve correct flow. Pressure range 2–3 bar.

All targets

He Cooling 4.5 0.15 MPa(1.5 bar) (22 psi)

±0.05 MPa(±0.5 bar)(±7 psi)

Yes -

Tracersystems Gas Purpose

Quality(Minimum purity)

Pressure*(flow)

Pressure range

UtilizesSupplyPanel? Note

Page 295: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix D —MINItrace Gas Purity and Pressure Settings 295

Notes and Comments:

Page 296: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

296 Appendix D —MINItrace Gas Purity and Pressure Settings

Page 297: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix E —Daily Records Log 297

APPENDIX E — DAILY RECORDS LOG

This appendix contains tables to record daily system readings as you start-up the sys-tem. Enter today’s date and record the requested information into the corresponding columns.

Save the table on the LAST page of this appendix (Table E-3 ) for use as a master, to make additional copies of the table, if you need them.

Page 298: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

298 Appendix E —Daily Records Log

Notes and Comments:

Page 299: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix E —Daily Records Log 299

TABLE E-1DAILY RECORDS LOG

Today’s Date SWCU BP1 Gauge

SWCU BP2 Gauge

SWCU BP3 Gauge

SWCU Cooling Temperature(from CSC panel)

SWCU Conductivity(from CSC panel)

Page 300: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

300 Appendix E —Daily Records Log

Notes or Comments:

Page 301: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix E —Daily Records Log 301

TABLE E-2DAILY RECORDS LOG

Today’s Date SWCU BP1 Gauge

SWCU BP2 Gauge

SWCU BP3 Gauge

SWCU Cooling Temperature(from CSC panel)

SWCU Conductivity(from CSC panel)

Page 302: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

302 Appendix E —Daily Records Log

Notes or Comments:

Page 303: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix E —Daily Records Log 303

TABLE E-3DAILY RECORDS LOG

Today’s Date SWCU BP1 Gauge

SWCU BP2 Gauge

SWCU BP3 Gauge

SWCU Cooling Temperature(from CSC panel)

SWCU Conductivity(from CSC panel)

Page 304: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

304 Appendix E —Daily Records Log

Notes or Comments:

Page 305: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix F —Power ON/OFF Sequences 305

APPENDIX F — POWER ON/OFF SEQUENCES

This appendix contains the recommended system power on and power off sequences. Use these sequences after successfully completing the Chapter 6 instructions.

F-1 Power ON1. Check mains power:

- R-S __________VAC

- R-T __________VAC

- S-T __________VAC

- R-N _________VAC

- S-N _________VAC

- T-N _________VAC

2. Switch on power to each of the following MINItrace components:

- CCAB - Circuit breaker on the MDP_______

- RFPG - Circuit breaker on the MDP_______

- CSC - Circuit breaker in the CCAB _______

- MASTER - Power switch on the back of the computer_______

3. After the Master System boots up, push reset on the GCU (General Control Unit) to load the corresponding software.

4. Start the water cooling pump for the vacuum system from the CSC COOLING panel.

- Press the ON button to start the water cooling pump

5. Press PUMP on the VCU (Vacuum Control Unit) to start the vacuum system.

- After 20-40 minutes the vacuum pressure should read less than 4.0x10-5mbar.

Page 306: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

306 Appendix F —Power ON/OFF Sequences

6. Logon to the Master System as the operator, and make your tracer.

- Please enter your user name: MINItrac

- Please enter your password: mini000

Page 307: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix F —Power ON/OFF Sequences 307

F-2 Power OFF1. Place the MINItrace system into OFF mode:

a. From the Service PC: Display one of the system pages and select SYSTEM OFF.

b. Exit to DOS from the Main Menu, then turn off the MSS.

2. To log off the Master and return to the login prompt:

a. Click on EXIT in the MINItrace function toolbar, at the top of the screen.

-or-

b. Click on the EXIT sign in the MINItrace desktop toolbar, at the bottom of the screen.

3. To SHUT DOWN the MASTER system.

a. Login as root:

* Please enter your user name: root

* Please enter your password: gemsrot

b. If necessary, open a Unix terminal window. (One should automatically open for you.)

c. Type/enter: shutdown -h now

d. When the screen prompts:

Program terminated

ok

e. You may safely turn off the Master system.

4. Press VENT to release vacuum.

5. Press OFF on the VCU.

6. Wait at least 2 hours, to let the diffusion pump cool down.

- If possible, leave the cooling pumps on longer than two hours, to help the diffusion pump cool down as much as possible, before shutting down the pumps.

Page 308: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

308 Appendix F —Power ON/OFF Sequences

7. Switch off the water cooling pump from the CSC COOLING panel.

- Press the OFF/RESET button to turn OFF the water cooling pump

8. Switch off power at each of the following MINItrace components:

- MASTER - Power switch on the back of the computer

- CSC - Circuit breaker in the CCAB

- CCAB - Circuit breaker on the MDP

- RFPG - Circuit breaker on the MDP

System Power OFF sequence completed.

Page 309: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 223294-100

Appendix G —RFPG Transformer Taps 309

APPENDIX G — RFPG TRANSFORMER TAPS

G-1 IntroductionThis instruction provides the information to determine the mains selection, in order to configure the RFPG taps to a particular mains supply

The RFPG cabinet has only one transformer, the EHT Transformer T1, which requires its taps to be set. The EHT Transformer T1 is a three phase transformer, located in the TPSU, and accessed from the bottom front or rear panels of the RFPG. The EHT trans-former is used to generate the anode voltage for the power amplifier tube.

All the other RFPG components are powered from the mains transformer in the Control Cabinet (CCAB). This appendix does NOT address the tapping of the CCAB transformer.

If the mains voltage is low (108 V – 132 V phase to neutral) you must change the mains circuit breaker SW1, and the mains filter FL1 in the RFPG, before you can set the EHT Transformer taps.

Page 310: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 223294-100 REV 5

310 Appendix G —RFPG Transformer Taps

G-2 Measure the Site Main Voltage

DANGER THIS PROCEDURE REQUIRES THE MEASUREMENT OF DANGEROUS MAINS VOLTAGES. THE TPSU GENERATES LETHAL VOLTAGES OF UP TO 8KV DURING NORMAL OPERATION. ALWAYS CONNECT THE GROUND STICK TO THE HIGH VOLTAGE FUSE, F1 BEFORE YOU TOUCH ANY RFPG COMPONENT.

ILLUSTRATION G-1GROUND STICK LOCATION

G-2-1 Measure the Incoming Power

1. Open the lower rear panel of the RFPG.

2. Find the TB4 terminal blocks, located in the left rear side of the TPSU.

3. Use a digital voltmeter, with better than 1.5% accuracy on r.m.s. a.c. voltage for this measurement.

• At the TB4 terminal blocks, measure the phase voltages, L1 – N, L2 – N and L3 – N.

• Neutral N is not required for the RFPG EHT transformer, so some installations may not have a neutral connected to TB4. If so, measure the line voltages L1 – L2, L2 – L3 and L1 – L3. Calculate the phase voltages by dividing the line volt-age values by 3

HV fuse

Ground stick

TB4 Filter FL1

Page 311: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 223294-100

Appendix G —RFPG Transformer Taps 311

G-2-2 Determine the Average Voltage and Fluctuations

1. Record the three phase voltages as VPL1, VPL2 and VPL3.

2. Use the following formula to calculate the average phase voltage VPA.

VPL1 + VPL2 + VPL3

VPA = ________________

33. Record this value.

Attempt to obtain information about the loading of the installation mains supply, so you can take measurements during peak and minimum loads. From the results determine minimum and maximum values VPAMIN and VPAMAX.

4. Use the following formula to calculate VPAMEAN

VPAMEAN = (VPAMIN + VPAMAX)/2

5. VPAMEAN equals the mean value of the mains voltage.

- Preferably the minimum and maximum values of the mains voltage should not differ by more than 5% from the mean value.

- Section elect tapping configuration according to section 3 of this instruction.

Page 312: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 223294-100 REV 5

312 Appendix G —RFPG Transformer Taps

G-3 Set the Taps

WARNING ENSURE THE RFPG IS ISOLATED FROM THE MAINS BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO SET THE TAPS.

CAUTION Open TPSU front cover and check, using a screwdriver, that all terminal screws on terminal block TBL 1, TBL 2 and TBL 3 are tightened. Loose screws might cause bad connections.

G-3-1 Overview

Notice All Mains voltage values refer to voltages from phase to neutral.

1. Refer to Table G-1 . Use the value VPAMEAN, calculated in the previous section.

2. Find the nearest value to VPAMEAN in the Table G-1 .

3. Proceed to the corresponding "Tapping Configuration" figure which provides the information to configure the transformer.

- A configuration could entail the fitting of up to 5 links per terminal block. The links are supplied attached to the RFPG. Please retain the spare links in case the mains supply changes and a new configuration is required.

- Furthermore, for each particular mains voltage, terminals have to be chosen on the transformer for the incoming phase leads.

Notice Read Section G-4 before proceeding further.

TABLE G-1TAPPING CONFIGURATION TABLE

Where // means in parallel

+ means in series additive (boost)

- means in series subtractive (buck)

VPAMEANVPA BANDVPAL - VPAH

Configuration Tapping Configuration Figure Number

112120128205215220230240246258277295

108 - 116116 - 124124 - 132197 - 212208 - 222212 - 227222 - 237232 - 248238 - 254247 - 269269 - 285285 - 305

(A//B)-(D//E)A//B(A//B)+(D//E)A+B-CA+B-C+DA+B-D-EA+B-DA+BA+B+DA+B+C-D-EA+B+CA+B+C+D+E

TC1 (page 315)TC2 (page 316)TC3 (page 318)TC4 (page 319)TC5 (page 320)TC6 (page 321)TC7 (page 322)TC8 (page 323)TC9 (page 324)TC10 (page 325)TC11 (page 326)TC12 (page 327)

Page 313: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 223294-100

Appendix G —RFPG Transformer Taps 313

G-4 Procedure to Replace SW1 and FL1 Follow the procedure in this section to replace circuit breaker, SW1, and Mains filter, FL1, for higher current operation.

If the VPAMEAN is such that its nearest value is 112, 120 or 128 V then the circuit breaker SW1 at the front of the TPSU must be changed to a higher rating, or it will continually trip. You must also change the Mains filter, FL1, to a higher rating.

• Refer to parts list CAC223-36005-xx-4 for the circuit breaker SW1 part information.

• Refer to parts list CAC223-36000-xx-4 for mains filter FL1 part information.

Notice Please follow the instructions in Section G-4-1 through G-4-3 to replace SW1 and FL1.

G-4-1 Procedure

Follow the procedure in this section to remove the circuit breaker and the filter from the TPSU, and replace them with a circuit breaker and a filter with a different current rating. The wiring is already specified for the high current rating.

G-4-2 Replace Circuit Breaker SW1

WARNING ENSURE THE RFPG IS ISOLATED FROM MAINS.

1. Remove the lower front panel of the RFPG by turning the screws ¼ of a turn ccw.

2. Locate SW1 on the switch mounting board of the TPSU. Refer to picture 1 at the end of this instruction.

3. Remove the wires from SW1 by releasing the screws identified as 1, 3, 5, 2, 4, and 6 in the figure.

4. Slacken, but do not remove, screws identified as D in figure 1.

5. Slide back the holding brackets and remove SW1.

6. SW1 replacement is rated at 70 - 100A and not 35 - 50A as the one just removed.

7. Put the new switch in position on the switchboard. Push the securing brackets tight against SW1 and re-tighten screws D.

8. Reconnect the wires as follows:

a. To SW1 terminal 2 connect the wire connecting to CON 1 terminal 1.

b. To SW1 terminal 4 connect the wire connecting to CON 1 terminal 3.

c. To SW1 terminal 6 connect the wire connecting to CON 1 terminal 5.

d. To SW1 terminal 1 connect the wire connecting to TB1 terminal 2.

e. To SW1 terminal 3 connect the wire connecting to TB1 terminal 4.

f. To SW1 terminal 5 connect the wire connecting to TB1 terminal 6.

Page 314: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 223294-100 REV 5

314 Appendix G —RFPG Transformer Taps

g. Check that all terminations are securely tightened.

9. Adjust the new circuit breaker for a minimum thermal trip current of 70 A.

• The adjusting screw is located below the lever.

• Follow the adjustment instructions on the front of the circuit breaker.

G-4-3 Replace Filter FL1

WARNING ENSURE THE RFPG IS ISOLATED FROM MAINS.

1. Open the lower rear panel of the TPSU.

DANGER THE TPSU GENERATES LETHAL VOLTAGES OF UP TO 8KV DURING NORMAL OPERATION. ALWAYS CONNECT THE GROUND STICK TO THE HIGH VOLTAGE FUSE, F1 BEFORE YOU TOUCH ANY RFPG COMPONENT.

2. Locate the mains filter FL1. Refer to picture 1 at the end of this instruction.

3. Disconnect 3 leads at the terminals marked L1, L2 and L3 and 3 leads at the termi-nals L1’, L2’ and L3’. Disconnect protective ground leads on both sides of the filter.

4. Loosen four screws which keep the filter fixed to the TPSU. Remove the filter.

5. Ring crimp terminals on the protective ground leads need to be replaced. Crimp ter-

minals suitable for 10mm2 cable and 8mm bolts shall be fitted.

6. FL1 replacement is rated at 70 A and not 36 A as the one just removed. Put the new filter in position and fasten it to the TPSU. The line side of the filter to face TB4. There are mounting holes which will fit to the new filter.

7. At the terminal blocks of the filter connect 3 leads to L1, L2 and L3 on the line side and and 3 leads to L1’, L2’ and L3’ on the load side. Tighten securely at the terminal blocks. Connect protective ground leads on both sides of the filter as well.

Page 315: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 223294-100

Appendix G —RFPG Transformer Taps 315

G-5 Set the Taps to the TC1 ConfigurationTC1:108 – 116 V Phase to Neutral.

ILLUSTRATION G-2TC1 TAP CONFIGURATION

VPA Band VPAL 108 - VPAH 116

Configuration (A//B) - (D//E)

1. Links on TBL1, TBL2 or TBL3 on the EHT Transformer:

TABLE G-2

2. Connection of mains phases to TBL1, TBL2 and TBL3 on the EHT transformer:

- Phase L1 from CON 2-5 to TBL1-17

- Phase L2 from CON 2-3 to TBL2-17

- Phase L3 from CON 2-1 to TBL3-17.

Neutral links from TBL1-1 to TBL2-4 and TBL2-1 to TBL3-4 are configured at the factory. Same configuration for all mains voltages. Do not change.

3. For this mains voltage the circuit breaker SW1 and the filter FL1 have to be changed, as a higher current rating is needed. Refer to Section G-4.

Link From To

1 3 7

2 5 9

3 11 25

4 19 23

5 21 27

Page 316: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 223294-100 REV 5

316 Appendix G —RFPG Transformer Taps

G-6 Set the Taps to the TC2 Configuration

TC2: 116 – 124 V phase to neutral.

ILLUSTRATION G-3TC2 TAP CONFIGURATION

VPA Band VPAL 116 - VPAH 124

Configuration A//B

1. Links on TBL1, TBL2 or TBL3 on the EHT Transformer:

TABLE G-3

N/A means not required for this mains configuration.

2. Connection of mains phases to TBL1, TBL2 and TBL3 on the EHT transformer:

- Phase L1 from CON 2-5 to TBL1-11

- Phase L2 from CON 2-3 to TBL2-11

- Phase L3 from CON 2-1 to TBL3-11

Neutral links from TBL1-1 to TBL2-4 and TBL2-1 to TBL3-4 are configured at the factory. Same configuration for all mains voltages. Do not change.

Link From To

1 3 7

2 5 9

3 N/A

4 N/A

5 N/A

Page 317: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 223294-100

Appendix G —RFPG Transformer Taps 317

3. For this mains voltage the circuit breaker SW1 and the filter FL1 have to be changed, as a higher current rating is needed. Refer to Section G-4.

Page 318: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 223294-100 REV 5

318 Appendix G —RFPG Transformer Taps

G-7 Set the Taps to the TC3 ConfigurationTC3: 124 – 132 V phase to neutral.

ILLUSTRATION G-4TC3 TAP CONFIGURATION

VPA Band VPAL 124 - VPAH 132

Configuration (A//B) - (D//E)

1. Links on TBL1, TBL2 or TBL3 on the EHT Transformer:

TABLE G-4

2. Connection of mains phases to TBL1, TBL2 and TBL3 on the EHT transformer:

- Phase L1 from CON 2-5 to TBL1-27

- Phase L2 from CON 2-3 to TBL2-27

- Phase L3 from CON 2-1 to TBL3-27

Neutral links from TBL1-1 to TBL2-4 and TBL2-1 to TBL3-4 are configured at the factory. Same configuration for all mains voltages. Do not change.

3. For this mains voltage the circuit breaker SW1 and the filter FL1 have to be changed as higher current rating is needed. Refer to Section G-4.

Link From To

1 3 7

2 5 9

3 11 17

4 19 23

5 21 25

Page 319: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 223294-100

Appendix G —RFPG Transformer Taps 319

G-8 Set the Taps to the TC4 ConfigurationTC4: 197 – 212 V phase to neutral.

ILLUSTRATION G-5TC4 TAP CONFIGURATION

VPA Band VPAL 197 - VPAH 212

Configuration A+B-C

1. Links on TBL1, TBL2 or TBL3 on the EHT Transformer:

TABLE G-5

N/A means not required for this mains configuration.

2. Connection of mains phases to TBL1, TBL2 and TBL3 on the EHT transformer:

- Phase L1 from CON 2-5 to TBL1-13

- Phase L2 from CON 2-3 to TBL2-13

- Phase L3 from CON 2-1 to TBL3-13

Neutral links from TBL1-1 to TBL2-4 and TBL2-1 to TBL3-4 are configured at the factory. Same configuration for all mains voltages. Do not change.

End of TC4.

Link From To

1 5 7

2 11 15

3 N/A

4 N/A

5 N/A

Page 320: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 223294-100 REV 5

320 Appendix G —RFPG Transformer Taps

G-9 Set the Taps to the TC5 ConfigurationTC5: 208 - 226 V phase to neutral.

ILLUSTRATION G-6TC5 TAP CONFIGURATION

VPA Band VPAL 208 - VPAH 226

Configuration A+B-C+D

1. Links on TBL1, TBL2 or TBL3 on the EHT Transformer:

TABLE G-6

N/A means not required for this mains configuration.

2. Connection of mains phases to TBL1, TBL2 and TBL3 on the EHT transformer:

- Phase L1 from CON 2-5 to TBL1-21

- Phase L2 from CON 2-3 to TBL2-21

- Phase L3 from CON 2-1 to TBL3-21

3. Neutral links from TBL1-1 to TBL2-4 and TBL2-1 to TBL3-4 are configured at the factory. Same configuration for all mains voltages. Do not change.

End of TC5.

Link From To

1 5 7

2 11 15

3 13 17

4 N/A

5 N/A

Page 321: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 223294-100

Appendix G —RFPG Transformer Taps 321

G-10 : Set the Taps to the TC6 ConfigurationTC6: 212 – 227 V Phase to NEUTRAL.

ILLUSTRATION G-7TC6 TAP CONFIGURATION

VPA Band VPAL 212 - VPAH 227

Configuration A+B-D-E

1. Links on TBL1, TBL2 or TBL3 on the EHT Transformer:

TABLE G-7

N/A means not required for this mains configuration.

2. Connection of mains phases to TBL1, TBL2 and TBL3 on the EHT transformer:

- Phase L1 from CON 2-5 to TBL1-23

- Phase L2 from CON 2-3 to TBL2-23

- Phase L3 from CON 2-1 to TBL3-23

3. Neutral links from TBL1-1 to TBL2-4 and TBL2-1 to TBL3-4 are configured at the factory. Same configuration for all mains voltages. Do not change.

End of TC6.

Link From To

1 5 7

2 11 21

3 17 27

4 N/A

5 N/A

Page 322: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 223294-100 REV 5

322 Appendix G —RFPG Transformer Taps

G-11 Set the Taps to the TC7 ConfigurationTC7: 222 – 237 V phase to neutral.

ILLUSTRATION G-8TC7 TAP CONFIGURATION

VPA Band VPAL 222 - VPAH 237

Configuration A+B-D

1. Links on TBL1, TBL2 and TBL3 on the EHT Transformer:

TABLE G-8

N/A means not required for this mains configuration.

2. Connection of mains phases to TBL1, TBL2 and TBL3 on the EHT transformer:

- Phase L1 from CON 2-5 to TBL1-17

- Phase L2 from CON 2-3 to TBL2-17

- Phase L3 from CON 2-1 to TBL3-17

3. Neutral links from TBL1-1 to TBL2-4 and TBL2-1 to TBL3-4 are configured at the factory. Same configuration for all mains voltages. Do not change.

End of TC7.

Link From To

1 TBL-5 TBL-7

2 TBL-11 TBL-21

3 N/A

4 N/A

5 N/A

Page 323: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 223294-100

Appendix G —RFPG Transformer Taps 323

G-12 Set the Taps to the TC8 ConfigurationTC8:232 – 248 V phase to neutral.

ILLUSTRATION G-9TC8 TAP CONFIGURATION

VPA Band VPAL 232 - VPAH 248

Configuration A+B

1. Links on TBL1, TBL2 or TBL3 on the EHT Transformer.

TABLE G-9

N/A means not required for this mains configuration.

2. Connection of mains phases to TBL1, TBL2 and TBL3 on the EHT transformer:

- Phase L1 from CON 2-5 to TBL1-11

- Phase L2 from CON 2-3 to TBL2-11

- Phase L3 from CON 2-1 to TBL3-11

3. Neutral links from TBL1-1 to TBL2-4 and TBL2-1 to TBL3-4 are configured at the factory. Same configuration for all mains voltages. Do not change.

End of TC8.

Link From To

1 5 7

2 N/A

3 N/A

4 N/A

5 N/A

Page 324: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 223294-100 REV 5

324 Appendix G —RFPG Transformer Taps

G-13 Set the Taps to the TC9 ConfigurationTC9: 238 – 254 V phase to neutral.

ILLUSTRATION G-10TC9 TAP CONFIGURATION

VPA Band VPAL 238 - VPAH 254

Configuration A+B+D

1. Links on TBL1, TBL2 or TBL3 on the EHT Transformer:

TABLE G-10

N/A means not required for this mains configuration.

2. Connection of mains phases to TBL1, TBL2 and TBL3 on the EHT transformer:

- Phase L1 from CON 2-5 to TBL1-21

- Phase L2 from CON 2-3 to TBL2-21

- Phase L3 from CON 2-1 to TBL3-21

3. Neutral links from TBL1-1 to TBL2-4 and TBL2-1 to TBL3-4 are configured at the factory. Same configuration for all mains voltages. Do not change.

End of TC9.

Link From To

1 5 7

2 11 17

3 N/A

4 N/A

5 N/A

Page 325: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 223294-100

Appendix G —RFPG Transformer Taps 325

G-14 Set the Taps to the TC10 ConfigurationTC10: 247 – 269 V phase to neutral.

ILLUSTRATION G-11TC10 TAP CONFIGURATION

VPA Band VPAL 247 - VPAH 269

Configuration A+B+C-D-E

1. Links on TBL1, TBL2 or TBL3 on the EHT Transformer:

TABLE G-11

N/A means not required for this mains configuration.

2. Connection of mains phases to TBL1, TBL2 and TBL3 on the EHT transformer:

- Phase L1 from CON 2-5 to TBL1-23

- Phase L2 from CON 2-3 to TBL2-23

- Phase L3 from CON 2-1 to TBL3-23

3. Neutral links from TBL1-1 to TBL2-4 and TBL2-1 to TBL3-4 are configured at the factory. Same configuration for all mains voltages. Do not change.

End of TC10.

Link From To

1 5 7

2 11 13

3 15 21

4 19 27

5 N/A

Page 326: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 223294-100 REV 5

326 Appendix G —RFPG Transformer Taps

G-15 Set the Taps to the TC11 ConfigurationTC11: 269 – 285 V Phase to Neutral.

ILLUSTRATION G-12TC11 TAP CONFIGURATION

VPA Band VPAL 269 - VPAH 285

Configuration A+B+C

1. Links on TBL1, TBL2 or TBL3 on the EHT Transformer:

TABLE G-12

N/A means not required for this mains configuration.

2. Connection of mains phases to TBL1, TBL2 and TBL3 on the EHT transformer.

- Phase L1 from CON 2-5 to TBL1-15

- Phase L2 from CON 2-3 to TBL2-15

- Phase L3 from CON 2-1 to TBL3-15

3. Neutral links from TBL1-1 to TBL2-4 and TBL2-1 to TBL3-4 are configured at the factory. Same configuration for all mains voltages. Do not change.

End of TC11.

Link From To

1 5 7

2 11 13

3 N/A

4 N/A

5 N/A

Page 327: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 223294-100

Appendix G —RFPG Transformer Taps 327

G-16 : Set the Taps to the TC12 Configuration

TC12: 285 – 305 V Phase to Neutral.

ILLUSTRATION G-13TC12 TAP CONFIGURATION

VPA Band VPAL 285 - VPAH 305

Configuration A+B+C+D+E

1. Links on TBL1, TBL2 or TBL3 on the EHT Transformer:

TABLE G-13

N/A means not required for this mains configuration.

2. Connection of mains phases to TBL1, TBL2 and TBL3 on the EHT transformer.

- Phase L1 from CON 2-5 to TBL1-27

- Phase L2 from CON 2-3 to TBL2-27

- Phase L3 from CON 2-1 to TBL3-27

3. Neutral links from TBL1-1 to TBL2-4 and TBL2-1 to TBL3-4 are configured at the factory. Same configuration for all mains voltages. Do not change.

End of TC12.

Link From To

1 5 7

2 11 13

3 15 17

4 21 23

5 N/A

Page 328: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 223294-100 REV 5

328 Appendix G —RFPG Transformer Taps

Page 329: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix H —Start-Up Certificate 329

APPENDIX H — START-UP CERTIFICATE

CAUTION The Mains input power is site dependent. Expect an input voltage of 208VAC, 380VAC, 415VAC or 480VAC. If necessary, change the system tap settings to accommodate the facility power.

TABLE H-1SUBSYSTEM POWER CHECKS

Subsystem/Component Parameter Measurement Unit

RFPG

Mains Input L1-L2 VAC

Mains Input L2-L3 VAC

Mains Input L3-L1 VAC

+5V +/- 0.1V VDC

+15V +/- 0.5V VDC

-15V +/- 0.5V VDC

+24V +/- 1V VDC

CCAB

Mains Input L1-L2 VAC

Mains Input L2-L3 VAC

Mains Input L3-L1 VAC

+15V +/- 0.3V VDC

-15V +/- 0.3V VDC

+24V +/- 1V VDC

Page 330: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

330 Appendix H —Start-Up Certificate

TABLE H-2RFPG MEASUREMENTS

Measurement Module RFPG Status

Parameter Unit Typical Standby

ActualStandby

H- (35kV)

0h 1h

DEE Volts Ref. V ----- --------

DEE Volts Read 1 V 0

DPA Reflected Power V 0

Load Tuning Error V ----- --------

RF Forward Voltage VRMS 0

RF Reflected Voltage VRMS 0

DPA RF Forward Voltage VRMS 0

Forward Power kW 0

Reflected Power kW 0

Anode Voltage kV 7.8

Anode Current A 0.15

Grid Voltage V -250

Grid Current mA -109

Screen Voltage V 750

Screen Current mA 25

Heater Voltage VRMS 7.6

Page 331: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix H —Start-Up Certificate 331

TABLE H-3CCAB/PSMC Water Flow

TABLE H-4CCAB/PSMC Interlocks

TABLE H-5CCAB/PSMC CURRENT AND VOLTAGE READINGS

Water Pass/Fail

PSMC Water Flow 4-8L/min

Interlock Name Pass/Fail

Panic Button/Door

Magnet Temperature

Magnet Water Flow

PSMC Water Flow

PSMC Temperature

Parameter Unit 10A 130ATypical Value

130AActual Value

Voltage Read PS A 68

Current Setting PSS A 130

Current PSS A 130

Voltage Read PSS VDC 68

Coil Voltage VDC 68

Ripple VAC 0.3

Page 332: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

332 Appendix H —Start-Up Certificate

TABLE H-6WATER FLOW SETTINGS AT THE WATER MANIFOLD

TABLE H-7WATER COOLING SYSTEM READINGS

Circuit Minimum Average Final Setting

RFPG - >15

MAGNET 4 5-6

RF1 8 10-12

RF2 8 10-12

TARGET (S) (S= Single) 2 3

TARGET (D) (D= Dual) 2 3

PSMC - 4-8

VACUUM 3 4

I - S 0.7 1

Parameter Unit Typical Value Actual Value

BP1 Expansion Vessel bar 0.5

BP2 Main Pump Pressure bar 4

BP3 Vacuum Cooling Pump bar 1

BT1 System Temperature oC 20

BT1 Alarm Level oC 25

BT2 Cooling Water Out Temperature oC 20

BF10 Deionizer Flow Paddle wheel motion

BQ1 Conductivity µS cm-1 0.2

Page 333: 2232994 r 05

GE HEALTHCARE MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL

REV 5 DIRECTION 2232994-100

Appendix H —Start-Up Certificate 333

TABLE H-8CONTROL SYSTEM READINGS

TABLE H-9VACUUM SYSTEM READINGS

TABLE H-10FUNCTIONAL TEST READINGS

Parameter Version

MSS Software Version

GCU Software Version

Parameter Typical Value Actual Value

Heating Time (START to diffusion pump OK)

<30min

Pump down time (Diffusion pump OK to vacuum OK)

~15min

Backing Pressure (A1) (Two days after vacuum startup)

2.0 x 10-3

Tank Pressure (B1)(Two days after vacuum startup)

2.0 x 10-7

WCU water temperature 20oC

Parameter Reading Unit

Delivery Time Target #1 seconds

Delivery Time Target #2 seconds

Delivery Time Target #3 seconds

Delivery Time Target #4 seconds

Delivery Time Target #5 seconds

Delivery Time Target #6 seconds

Page 334: 2232994 r 05

MINItrace INSTALLATION MANUAL GE HEALTHCARE

DIRECTION 2232994-100 REV 5

334 Appendix H —Start-Up Certificate

Notes and Comments:

Page 335: 2232994 r 05
Page 336: 2232994 r 05

www.gehealthcare.com

GE HealthcareHusbyborgS-752 28 UppsalaSWEDEN

TRADEMARKSAscarite(II)® is a registered trademark of Arthur H. Thomas Co.Sicapent® is a registered trademark of E. Merck. Swagelok® is a registered trademark of Swagelok Co.Teflon® and Tefzel® are registered trademarks of E.I. du Pont de Nemours & Co.Sun™ Ultra™ station, Sunblade™ and OpenWindows™ are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

WARRANTY AND LIABILITYGE Healthcare (GEHC) does not accept liability for injury to personnel or damageto equipment that may result from misuse of this equipment, failure to observethe hazard notices contained in this manual, or failure to observe federal, stateand/or local regulations.

Whilst every effort has been made to ensure the technical accuracy of this manual, the information contained herein is subject to change without notice.GEHC makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material.

GEHC shall not be liable for errors contained herein, or for incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of the equipment described in this manual.

A General Electric Company - going to market as GE Healthcare.

Copyright© 2007 by General Electric Company. All rights reserved.Property of GE. No Rights Licensed - Do not duplicate. Disclosure to Third Parties Prohibited.